Installation

HiPath 4000 V4.0

Initial Installation/Startup
Installation Instructions

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631

www.siemens.com/enterprise
 Copyright © Siemens Enterprise Communications GmbH & Co. KG 2007
Hofmannstr. 51, D-81359 München
Reference No.: P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631
The information provided in this document contains merely general
descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual use do
not always apply as described or which may change as a result of further
development of the products. An obligation to provide the respective
characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms of contract.
Subject to availability. Right of modification reserved. The trademarks used
are owned by Siemens Enterprise Communications GmbH & Co. KG or their
respective owners.

www.siemens.com/enterprise
 montbuchIVZ.fm
For internal distribution only Contents

Contents 0

1 Introduction and Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Target Group and Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.1 Manual Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.2 Reference Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.3.3 Notational Conventions and Symbols Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.4 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.4.1 Safety Information: Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.4.2 Safety Information: Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.4.3 Safety information: Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.4.4 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.4.5 Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.4.6 Reporting Accidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.5 Special Safety Information and Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.5.1 Electrical Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.5.2 Burning Behavior of HiPath System Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.5.3 Shielded Cabling for LAN Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.5.4 UL and CSA Standards, U.S. and Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.5.4.1 Product ID -Safety- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.5.5 FCC and Industry Canada Compliance, U.S. and Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.5.5.1 FCC Registration and Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.5.6 Industry Canada Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.5.6.1 Equipment Attachment Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1.5.6.2 Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1.5.7 Related Information, United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1.6 Data Protection and Data Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.7 Documentation Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.1 AC-powered, Nonredundant HiPath 4000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.1.1 CSPCI Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.1.1.2 Duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.1.3 Mono. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.1.1.4 LTUW Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.1.2 AC-powered, Redundant HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.1.3 DC-powered, Redundant HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.1.4 AP 3700 Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.1.5 Survivability Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.2 Switching Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.2.1 Common Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.2.2 Switching Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 0-3
montbuchIVZ.fm
Contents For internal distribution only

2.2.3 Service Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

2.3 Telephony Shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.4 External Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.4.1 Administrative Data Processor (ADP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.4.1.1 System Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.4.1.2 Direct AMO Dialog (DAD) Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.4.1.3 Remote Maintenance and Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.4.1.4 Local Maintenance Terminal Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.1.5 Call Detail Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.1.6 Traffic Metering and Statistics Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.1.7 System Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.1.8 RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.1.9 HSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.5 Internal Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.5.1 Internal Server Common Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
3 Preparing for Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Installation Procedures Matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Installation Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3 Conducting the Site Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.4 Receiving the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.5 Inspecting for Shipping Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.6 Removing the System from its Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.7 Unloading a System with a Roller Base from the Pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.8 Positioning the Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.9 Leveling the Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.9.1 Leveling a Roller Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.9.2 Leveling an AP 3700-9 (Standalone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.10 Removing the Front Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.10.1 AP 3300 Front Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.10.2 AP 3700 Front Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.10.3 AP 3300 Back Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.11 Important Labels on the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.12 Inventorying the System Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.13 Inventorying the System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.14 Inventorying the Installation Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.15 Pre-Installation Trunk Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.16 Installing Seismic Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.17 Stacking HiPath 4000 Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3.18 Installing the Cable Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
4 Special Installation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Removing 24-Port Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.1 SIVAPAC-to-SIPAC Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.2 Installing the Adapter 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
0-4 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuchIVZ.fm
For internal distribution only Contents

4.2 Network Strips, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

4.2.1 Installing 16DA Splitting Strips on a New Main Distribution Frame, I.M.. . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.2 Installing 24DA Splitting Strips on an Old Main Distribution Frame . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.3 Installing AP 3700 Cabinets in 19-Inch Cabinets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.4 Shielding Connection on the Opening of the LTU Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
5 Installation Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Standard Cabinet Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.1 Single-Cabinet Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 Multiple Cabinet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.3 AC-to-DC Power Box Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.4 DC-to-DC Power Box Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.5 Free-Standing Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.5.1 CSPCI Box in UCS Shelf, Stack 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.5.2 CSPCI Box in External 19" Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.5.3 HiPath 4000 Free-Standing Installation (Maximum Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.6 Cabling Diagram, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.7 Shelf Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.7.1 CSPCI Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.7.1.1 Duplex Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.7.1.2 Simplex Mono Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.7.2 UPR Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.7.3 Unit Peripheral Nonredundant Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.7.4 AP 3700-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.7.5 AP 3700-13 (Expansion Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.7.6 Redundant Power Box Stacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.8 Installation with AP 3700 cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.8.1 Connecting AP 3700-9 to L80XF/LTUW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.8.2 Connecting AP 3700-13 to CSPCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.8.3 AP 3700 configuration rules and examples with 19" cabinets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.8.3.1 Suitable cabinet models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.8.3.2 Sample configuration AP 3700 or AP3700 IP in a cabinet with 25 rack units 5-22
5.8.3.3 Sample configuration CSPCI with AP 3700 in a cabinet with 37 rack units . 5-23
5.8.3.4 Sample configuration CSPCI with AP 3700 in a cabinet with 42 rack units . 5-24
5.8.3.5 Sample configuration CSPCI with AP 3700 in a cabinet with 47 rack units . 5-25
5.9 MDFHX 6 Mounting Location, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.10 MDFHX 8 Mounting Location, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
6 Grounding the HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1 Grounding the MDF, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2 Connecting and Grounding the Cabinets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.1 Grounding the Base Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.2.2 Installing the Ground Straps Between Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3 Grounding the System, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.4 Grounding the System, U.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 0-5
montbuchIVZ.fm
Contents For internal distribution only

6.5 Grounding AP 3700 System Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

6.6 System Ground Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
7 Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 Connecting to the Mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.1.1 Connecting to the Mains with LUNA/LPC80 Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.1.2 Connecting to the Mains Using the Power Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.2 Installing a Three-Phase Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.3 Installing a Single-Phase Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.4 Overview of Network Connection 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.5 Installing a Three-Phase or Single-Phase Connection with Mid-Point Grounding, I.M.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.6 Overview of Network Connection 2, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7.7 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.8 AC Connection to Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.8.1 Routing the Power Cables on an AC-Powered, Nonredundant HiPath 4000. . . . 7-14
7.8.2 Attaching the Power Cable to the CSPCI Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7.9 Setting the Operating Mode for the LPC80, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.9.1 Setting the Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7.10 DC Connection with the External Power Supply, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.10.1 Routing the Power Cables on an AC-Powered, Redundant HiPath 4000 . . . . . 7-20
7.10.2 Routing the Power Cables from the UACD and UDCD to the HiPath 4000 . . . 7-22
7.10.3 Attaching a DC Cable to the CSPCI Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
7.11 DC Connection with UP/L80XF Cabinet (I.M. Version). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
7.12 AC-to-DC Connection with a Redundant LTUW Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
7.13 DC Connection with Redundant UPR/LTUW Box (I.M. Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7.13.1 Connecting the Battery to the Power Box, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7.13.2 Connecting the MDF for a Non-Redundant, System, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
7.14 AC-to-DC Connection with AP 3700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
7.14.1 AC Connection AP 3700-9/AP 3700-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
7.14.2 DC Power Supply AP 3700-9/AP 3700-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7.14.3 AC connection AP 3700 in 19" cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7.14.4 DC connection AP 3700 with DCDR (fuse unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
7.14.5 DC connection AP 3700 with DCDR (DC kit for 19-inch cabinet). . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
7.14.6 DCDR connection from behind. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
7.14.7 DC connection of AP 3700 to the MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
7.15 19-Inch UACD Model (PSR930/PSR930E). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
7.15.1 Part Numbers for the UACD Power Box (PSR930/PSR930E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
7.15.2 AC/DC Connection with UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) in 19-Inch Cabinet with AP3700
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
7.15.3 AC/DC Connection with UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) in 19-Inch Cabinet with UPR/
LTUW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
7.15.4 Power Supply Connection Variants for UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) . . . . . . . . . 7-50
7.15.4.1 Connection to a Three-Phase Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
7.15.4.2 Installing a Single-Phase Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
0-6 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuchIVZ.fm
For internal distribution only Contents

7.15.4.3 Installing a Two-Phase Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

7.15.4.4 Installing a Delta Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
7.15.5 Battery Connection for UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
7.16 UACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
7.16.1 UACD Equipment Part Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
7.16.2 UACD 1 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
7.16.3 UACD 2 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
7.17 Battery Manager Cabinet for L80XF Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
7.17.1 Part Numbers for Battery Manager Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
7.17.2 Battery Manager, Connection Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
7.18 UDCD, North America Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
7.18.1 UDCD Equipment Part Numbers, North America Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
7.18.2 Overview of UDCD Stack 1 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
7.19 Connecting the Power Box to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
7.19.1 Connecting the MDF for a Redundant System, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
7.20 PSDXE Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
7.21 Calculating the Battery Cabling, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
8 Internal Line Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 Installing Signal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1.1 Overview of CSPCI (RTM board) connection to L80XF/LTUW/AP 3700 (LTUCA board)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.1.2 Overview of CSPCI Periphery Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.2 Connecting to the LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.3 Installing the Service Alarm Cable and Trunk Bypass on the HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . 8-6
9 External Cabling Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1 MDFHX6 Assembly, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.1 Cabling from the LTU to the MDF, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.1.2 Cabling route from AP 3700-13 cabinet to the MDF (IM version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.2 MDFHX8 Assembly, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.2.1 Cabling from the LTU to the MDF, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.2.2 Cabling from AP 3700-13 cabinet to the MDF (IM version). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.3 Overvoltage Protection of the Modules, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.4 MDF Cable Connections, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.5 Connecting the Signal or Alarm Cables to the MDF, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.6 Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9.6.1 Subscriber Line Module Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.6.1.1 Connecting the Subscriber Line Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9.6.2 Trunk Module Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
9.6.2.1 Connecting the Trunk Modules to the MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
9.6.2.2 Connection to MDF with DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
9.6.2.3 Connecting to the MDF with CDR and DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
9.6.2.4 Connecting to the MDF with CDR but without DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
9.7 Connecting CMI Fuse Modules, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 0-7
montbuchIVZ.fm
Contents For internal distribution only

9.8 Creating a Strapping List, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

9.8.1 System Assignment 16/24 DA Splitting Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
9.8.2 Network Assignment 25/35 DA Strapping Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
10 Installing Peripheral Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.1 Installing the AC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.1.1 Verifying the Site Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.1.2 Installing the AC4 Handset Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.1.3 Installing the AC Cables to the Controller Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
10.1.4 Installing the AC4 Keyboard Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
10.1.5 Cabling of the AC4 Attendant Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10.1.6 Connecting the AC4 to the UAE6 Terminal Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.1.7 AC4 Ordering Packages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.1.8 AC4 Order Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
10.1.9 Connecting the AC4 to the UCON (World) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.1.10 Powering On the AC4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10.2 Connecting the Internal Clock Box AICB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10.3 Connecting the Service Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10.4 Hicom Teleservice HTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
10.5 Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
10.5.1 Connecting External Devices for Teleworking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
10.5.2 Connecting ISDN Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
10.5.2.1 PNE/PBXXX Back-to-Back with Modem and DIUN2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
10.5.2.2 PNE/PBXXX Back-to-Back with Modem and DIUN2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
10.5.2.3 PNE/PBXXX Back-to-Back in Single-Card Box with DIUN2 . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
10.5.2.4 PNE/PBXXX Back to Back with Modem in DIUS2 Emulation with DIUN2. 10-20
10.5.2.5 CDG/PBXXX as Gateway, Fully Integrated Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
10.5.2.6 CDG/PBXXX with DIUN2 as Gateway, Partially Integrated Mode. . . . . . . 10-21
10.5.3 Cordless Multicell Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
10.5.3.1 CMI (V2.1/UP0/E) Network Local Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
10.6 Installing the Breakout Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
10.7 Installing the Distance Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
10.8 Installing and Configuring the HiPath ProCenter Server Message Stream. . . . . . . 10-30
10.9 Installing the Music-on-Hold Interface Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
10.10 Installing the Optiset E Adapter Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
11 Installing the IPDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.2 IPDA Connection Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.2.1 Connecting to AP 3700-9 IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.2.2 Connecting to LTUW/L80XF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
12 Starting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.1 Completing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.2 Pre-Power On Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
12.2.1 Reseating the Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
0-8 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuchIVZ.fm
For internal distribution only Contents

12.2.2 Checking the Signal Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

12.2.3 Checking the Power Distribution Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.3 Turning On a Nonredundant AC-Powered HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.4 Turning On Cabinet 1 and 2 of a Redundant AC-Powered HiPath 4000. . . . . . . . . 12-4
12.5 Turning On Cabinet 3 and 4 of a Redundant AC-Powered HiPath 4000. . . . . . . . . 12-5
12.6 Turning On Cabinet 1 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.7 Turning On Cabinet 2 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
12.8 Turning On Cabinet 3 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
12.9 Turning On Cabinet 4 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
12.10 Installing PROCOMM PLUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
12.11 Activating the Clock Battery on the DSCXL Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
12.12 Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
12.13 Installing the Customer Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
12.13.1 Factory-Generated Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
12.13.2 Site-Generated Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
12.14 Starting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
12.15 Connecting to the TAP, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
12.15.1 Checking the Ring Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
12.16 Replacing the Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
13 Verifying the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.1 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.2 Checking the Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.3 Checking the Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.4 Verifying the AC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.5 Testing the Maintenance Terminal for the Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13.6 Checking and Testing the Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
13.7 Testing the Restart and Failure Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
13.8 Backing up the Customer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13.9 Setting and Activating the HTS Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13.10 Checking the Ring Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13.11 Verifying the Station-to-MDF Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13.12 Verifying Transmission Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13.12.1 Balancing Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13.12.2 Choosing the Balance Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13.12.3 Selecting the Balance Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13.12.3.1 Balancing CO Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13.12.3.2 Balancing DID Trunks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13.12.3.3 Balancing OPS Lines and Trunks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
13.12.4 Verifying ISDN Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
13.12.5 Verifying T1 Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
13.12.6 Recording Circuit IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
13.13 Verifying the MO-Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
13.14 Verifying the Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
13.15 Verifying the Operation of System Features and Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 0-9
montbuchIVZ.fm
Contents For internal distribution only

13.15.1 Testing CDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20

13.15.2 Testing Least-Cost Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
13.16 Verifying the System Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
13.17 Customer Training, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
14 Adding Cabinets to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.1 Expansion Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.2 Connecting the Cabinet Stacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
0-10 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch01.fm
For internal distribution only Introduction and Important Notes
Product Overview

1 Introduction and Important Notes

1.1 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Target Group and Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.1 Manual Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.2 Reference Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.3.3 Notational Conventions and Symbols Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.4 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.4.1 Safety Information: Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.4.2 Safety Information: Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.4.3 Safety information: Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.4.4 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.4.5 Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.4.6 Reporting Accidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.5 Special Safety Information and Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.5.1 Electrical Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.5.2 Burning Behavior of HiPath System Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.5.3 Shielded Cabling for LAN Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.5.4 UL and CSA Standards, U.S. and Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.5.4.1 Product ID -Safety- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.5.5 FCC and Industry Canada Compliance, U.S. and Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.5.5.1 FCC Registration and Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.5.6 Industry Canada Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.5.6.1 Equipment Attachment Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1.5.6.2 Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1.5.7 Related Information, United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1.6 Data Protection and Data Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.7 Documentation Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

1.1 Product Overview

HiPath 4000 V4.0 is an innovative, state-of-the-art, real-time IP system for a new level of quality
in IP communication.
HiPath 4000 V4.0 not only combines the advantages of IP-based communication with the
scope of service of circuit-switched communication systems, it also offers more resilience than
ever expected from pure TDM solutions.
The real-time IP system HiPath 4000 V4.0 is the ideal communication solution for medium-
sized, large, and very large enterprises and groups. The communication architecture is
designed both for companies with distributed remote architecture and those with campus
structures.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 1-1
montbuch01.fm

Introduction and Important Notes For internal distribution only

Target Group and Requirements

The common, open IP architecture allows companies to link sites together for communication
within a sophisticated network infrastructure. HiPath 4000 V4.0 is therefore the ideal
communication solution for companies that are looking for more than just a straightforward IP
switch. With options for connecting system and IP telephones and integrating soft clients, this
the perfect communication system for every workplace.
The sophisticated resilience functions offered by HiPath 4000 V4.0 guarantee your company a
level of profitability that can only be achieved with HiPath communication solutions and
intelligent applications. A broad range of options, opportunities for further development and
greater added value from existing and future investments make the real-time IP system HiPath
4000 V4.0 an especially cost-effective solution.

1.2 Target Group and Requirements

This manual provides overview information and instructions for installing and testing the HiPath
4000 V4.0.
This manual is written for Siemens-trained personnel who install and maintain the HiPath 4000.

1.3 Using this Manual

This manual only describes the initial installation of a new system. It does not cover the upgrade
or update of an existing system (for information on upgrading and updating, see Section 1.3.2,
“Reference Manuals”).

1.3.1 Manual Structure

This manual contains the following chapters:
Chapter 2, “Overview”, provides a description of the HiPath 4000. It also provides information
about its major functional units.
Chapter 3, “Preparing for Installation”, describes the procedures that must be performed before
installing the system.
Chapter 4, “Special Installation Notes”, provides special information for installation.
Chapter 5, “Installation Variants”, provides instructions for installing single, multicabinet, wall,
and free-standing systems.
Chapter 6, “Grounding the HiPath 4000”, describes the procedures for grounding the HiPath
4000.
Chapter 7, “Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply”, describes the power connection, con-
nection procedures and calculation of the battery cable cross-section.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
1-2 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch01.fm
For internal distribution only Introduction and Important Notes
Using this Manual

Chapter 8, “Internal Line Cables”, describes the procedures for installing the cables associated
with the HiPath 4000.
Chapter 9, “External Cabling Assemblies”, provides installation and cabling diagrams for the Hi-
Path 4000 system.
Chapter 10, “Installing Peripheral Equipment”, provides instructions for installing the peripheral
equipment associated with the system.
Chapter 11, “Installing the IPDA”, describes the connection of the HiPath 4000 to the IPDA (IP
Distributed Architecture) system.
Chapter 12, “Starting the System”, describes commissioning and start-up of the HiPath 4000.
Chapter 13, “Verifying the System”, contains the test procedures used for verifying the opera-
tion of the system.
Chapter 14, “Adding Cabinets to the System”, describes a procedure for expanding the system.

1.3.2 Reference Manuals

● HiPath 4000 V4.0 Service Manual
● HiPath 4000 V4.0 Feature Description
● HiPath 4000 V4.0 Upgrade
● HiPath 4000 V4.0 Upgrade Networks
● HiPath 4000 V4.0 Country Adaptations

1.3.3 Notational Conventions and Symbols Used

This manual uses the following conventions:

Italics The names of menus, dialog boxes, and icons as well as the
names of referenced manuals are printed in italics.
Courier Examples of screen messages and responses that you make to
input requests or entries in initialization files are printed in
Courier.
Boldface The names of folders, tabs, menu options, commands and
buttons are printed in boldface.
> This character identifies work instructions.

This manual uses the following symbols:

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 1-3
montbuch01.fm

Introduction and Important Notes For internal distribution only

Using this Manual

“i" identifies useful information.

>
Safety information
7 Hazard information. See sections Section 1.4 and 1.5 for details.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
1-4 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch01.fm
For internal distribution only Introduction and Important Notes
Safety Information

1.4 Safety Information

Only service personnel and authorized specialists are permitted to work on the system. Take
note of the following:
● Make sure to read all notices on the equipment carefully and comply with all safety notices.
Familiarize yourself with emergency numbers.
● Always consult your manager before starting work in conditions where the necessary
safety precautions do not appear to be in place.

Types of safety information

This manual uses three types of safety information:

Danger
7 Danger symbols call attention to a situation that could cause serious injury or death
to a person.

Warning
7 Warning symbols call attention to a situation that could cause serious injury to a
person.

Caution
7 Caution symbols call attention to a situation that could damage or destroy hardware
or software.

Further symbols for specifying the source of danger more exactly1:

1 5 3 0 6 4 2
Electricity Weight Heat Fire Chemicals ESD* Laser
* electrostatically sensitive devices

1. These symbols are not usually used in the manual. They explain symbols that may be depicted on the
equipment.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 1-5
montbuch01.fm

Introduction and Important Notes For internal distribution only

Safety Information

1.4.1 Safety Information: Danger

● Operation is only allowed with an outlet that has connected ground contacts.
● Before operation and before connecting subscribers, ensure that the system is properly
connected to the separately connected protective grounding wire.
Never operate the system without the mandatory grounding wire!
● Note: Voltages above 30 Vac (alternating current) or 60 Vdc (direct current) are dangerous.
● If the power cable appears to be damaged, replace it immediately.
● Replace any damaged safety equipment (covers, labels and ground wires) immediately.
● Use only original accessories. Failure to comply with this safety information may damage
the equipment or violate safety and EMC regulations.
● If the maintenance work requires the power supply of the system to be shut down:
– Before starting any work on the system, determine whether it has a disconnect device
and where it is located.
– If you need to turn off the system power supply for maintenance work, use the shut-off
switch to disconnect the system from the power source, or pull all power plugs in the
system.
– Secure the disconnect device mechanically so that it cannot be used by other persons
and attach a sign reading “DO NOT OPERATE” to the disconnect device.
A disconnect device can be a shut-off switch (main switch) or circuit breaker (fuse/
automatic circuit breaker).
● Only personnel with proper qualifications or authorized electricians should perform work
on the low-voltage network (100 - 240 V ac).
● If you are performing work on circuits with hazardous voltages, always work together with
a partner who is familiar with the location of the switch for the power supply.
● Never touch live wires without ensuring adequate insulation.
● Ensure that the system is not powered from an additional power source, or that it is
protected by an additional fuse or an additional main switch.
● Use only approved battery packs and batteries. The relevant chapters describe required
procedures.
● Before starting any work, check whether the circuits involved are still receiving power.
Never take it for granted that turning off a main switch or circuit breaker will reliably interrupt
all circuits.
● During a thunderstorm, do not connect or remove telephone lines and PC boards.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
1-6 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch01.fm
For internal distribution only Introduction and Important Notes
Safety Information

● Expect leakage current from the telecommunications network.

Disconnect all telecommunications cables from the system before unplugging the ground
wire from the system.
● Ensure that, whenever work is carried out on an open system, the system is never left
unsupervised.

1.4.2 Safety Information: Warnings

● There is a risk of explosion if a lithium battery is not correctly replaced. The lithium battery
must be replaced only by an identical battery or one recommended by the manufacturer.
(Always dispose of lithium batteries properly.)
● Be aware of additional dangers with low voltages and large cross-sections. Cables with a
large cross-section generally have lower voltages, although the amperages are higher.
This results in particular risks in situations such as a short circuit.
● Always disconnect the power supply when you are working directly next to a power supply
unit or direct current converter, unless the work instructions expressly permit you to work
without having to shut off the power.
● Never try to lift heavy objects without assistance.
● If there are any optical interfaces: In case of laser radiation, do not look directly into the
beam.

1.4.3 Safety information: Caution

● Prior to start-up, check the system’s set nominal voltage (operating instructions and
nameplate).
● As long as the power supply is switched on, always observe the greatest caution when
performing measurements on powered components and maintenance work on plug-in
cards, PC boards and covers.
● Disconnect all power plugs in the system when you need to turn off the system power
supply.
● Only use tools and equipment which are in perfect condition. Do not use equipment with
visible damage.
● To protect electrostatically sensitive devices (ESD):
– Always wear the wristband in the prescribed manner before performing any work on
PC boards and modules.
– Transport PC boards only in suitable protective packaging.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 1-7
montbuch01.fm

Introduction and Important Notes For internal distribution only

Safety Information

– Always place PC boards on a grounded conducting base, and do not work on the PC
boards anywhere else.
– Only use grounded soldering irons.
● Install cables in such a way that they do not pose a risk of accident (tripping), and cannot
be damaged.

1.4.4 General Information

● If the system is brought into the operating site from a cold environment, condensation may
occur. Wait until the equipment has adjusted to the ambient temperature and is completely
dry before starting it up.
● Before starting wall assembly, check whether the load-bearing capacity of the wall is
adequate, e.g. in the event of plasterboard walls.
● When maintenance work has been completed, always re-install all safety equipment in the
right place. Also close all doors, covers, or the housing after completing test and
maintenance work.
● When working on the systems, never wear loose clothing and always tie back long hair.
● Do not wear jewelry, metal watchbands or clothes with metal ornaments or rivets . There
is a risk of injury and short circuit.
● The surfaces and coatings of mirrors are conductive. Never touch powered components
with a mirror; you might injure yourself and/or at least cause short-circuit damage.
● Always wear the necessary eye protection whenever appropriate.
● Always wear a hard hat where there is a risk of injury from falling objects.
● Check your tools regularly. Only use intact tools.
● All cables and lines leaving a system cabinet must be shielded between the connection
point in the cabinet and, at the very least, the point at which they leave the cabinet.
Use a clip and pressure screw to contact all braided shields to the cabinet outlet. This also
applies to permanently connected service equipment.
● Connect all cables only to the specified connection points.
● Do not install any external modems in the system cabinets.
● To conform with the legal fire protection and EMC requirements, operate the HiPath
systems only when closed. You may open the system only briefly for assembly and
maintenance work.
● Do not allow easily flammable materials to be stored in or near the room where the system
is installed.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
1-8 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch01.fm
For internal distribution only Introduction and Important Notes
Safety Information

● Do not store documents, descriptions, operating instructions, and similar flammable

materials in the cabinet.
● Ensure that the workplace is well lit.
● Clutter in the workplace increases the risk of accidents.

All electrical and electronic products should be disposed of separately from

the municipal waste stream via designated collection facilities appointed by
the government or the local authorities.

The correct disposal and separate collection of your old appliance will help
prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human
health. It is a precondition for reuse and recycling of used electrical and
electronic equipment.

For more detailed information about disposal of your old appliance, please
contact your city office, waste disposal service, the shop where you
purchased the product or your sales representative.

The statements quoted above are only fully valid for equipment which is
installed and sold in the countries of the European Union and is covered by
the directive 2002/96/EC. Countries outside the European Union may have
other regulations regarding the disposal of electrical and electronic
equipment.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 1-9
montbuch01.fm

Introduction and Important Notes For internal distribution only

Safety Information

1.4.5 Emergencies

What to Do in an Emergency
● Always remain calm if an accident occurs.
● Always switch off the power supply before you touch an accident victim.
● If you are not able to immediately switch off the power supply, only touch the victim with
non-conductive materials (such as a wooden broom handle), and first of all try to isolate
the victim from the power supply.

First Aid
● Be familiar with basic first aid procedures for electrical shock. A fundamental knowledge of
the various resuscitation methods if the victim has stopped breathing or if the victim’s heart
is no longer beating, as well as first aid for treating burns, is absolutely necessary in such
emergencies.
● If the victim is not breathing, immediately perform mouth-to-mouth or mouth-to-nose
resuscitation.
● If you have appropriate training, immediately perform heart massage if the victim’s heart is
not beating.

Calling for Help

● Immediately call an ambulance or an emergency physician. Provide the following
information in the following sequence:
– Where did the accident happen?
– What happened?
– How many people were injured?
– What type of injuries?
– Wait for questions.

1.4.6 Reporting Accidents

● Immediately report all accidents, near accidents and potential sources of danger to your
manager.
● Report all electrical shocks, no matter how small.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
1-10 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch01.fm
For internal distribution only Introduction and Important Notes
Special Safety Information and Requirements

1.5 Special Safety Information and Requirements

The following additional safety information and requirements should be observed:

1.5.1 Electrical Environment

HiPath communications servers are approved for connection to TN-S power supply systems.
They can also be connected to a TN-C-S power supply system in which the PEN conductor is
divided into a ground wire and a neutral wire. TN-S and TN-C-S systems are defined in the IEC
364-3 standard.

This device complies with the EU directive 1999/5/EC as attested by the CE

marking.

This device has been manufactured in accordance with our certified

environmental management system (ISO 14001). This process ensures
that energy consumption and the use of primary raw materials are kept to a
minimum, thus reducing waste production.

1.5.2 Burning Behavior of HiPath System Cables

Fire safety regulations are specified in country-specific building codes; adhere to the respective
regulations.
As regards their burning behavior, HiPath system cables conform to the international standard
IEC 60332-1 *).
The responsible project management and service departments must verify whether this
standard satisfies the applicable building regulations and any other additional regulations.
*) The following standards include equivalent requirements regarding the burning behavior of
cables.

IEC 60332-1 EN 50265-1 with VDE 0482 parts 265-1 with

EN 50265-2-1 VDE 0842 parts 265-2-1

-------------------------- -------------------------- --------------------------

Note: Note: Note:
IEC 60332-1 corresponds EN 50265-1 and -2-1 VDE 0482 parts 265-1 and -2-1 replace
to UL VW-1 replace HD 405.1 VDE 0472, part 804, test type B

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 1-11
montbuch01.fm

Introduction and Important Notes For internal distribution only

Special Safety Information and Requirements

1.5.3 Shielded Cabling for LAN Connections

Compliance with CE requirements regarding the electromagnetic compatibility of "SEN
products with LAN connections" is subject to the following prerequisite:
● The system may only be operated with shielded connection cabling. In other words, a
shielded category 5 cable of at least 3 meters in length must be used between shielded
LAN connection jacks on the system and connections to the building installation or external
active components. The shielded portion of the cable must be grounded (connected to the
building potential equalization) at the cable end closest to the building installation or
external active component.
● In the case of shorter connections with an external active component (LAN switch or
similar), a shielded category 5 cable must also be used. However, the active component
must be equipped with a corresponding shielded LAN connection with a grounded
shielding connection (connected to the building potential equalization).
● The shielding properties of the cabling components must at least meet the requirements
of the European standard EN 50173-1 "Generic cabling systems" (and the references
specified in this document).
● Building installations that are equipped with fully-shielded symmetrical copper cabling in
accordance with the Class D requirements*) of EN 50173-1 meet the above prerequisite.
● *) Class D is fulfilled when, for example, category 5 components (cable, terminal boxes,
connection cable, etc.) are installed.
● For the LAN connection to boards in LTUs, the notes regarding the shielding connection at
the opening of the LTU frame must be observed accordingly.

1.5.4 UL and CSA Standards, U.S. and Canada

Table 1-1 names the product security standards satisfied by the HiPath 4000 system.

Product UL 60950-1,
CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1
HiPath 4000 ✔
Table 1-1 UL and CSA standards

1.5.4.1 Product ID -Safety-

This product is listed as "UL Listed" or "C-UL Listed" and satisfies the requirements of the UL
or CSA standard "Information Technology Equipment -Safety- Part 1".

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
1-12 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch01.fm
For internal distribution only Introduction and Important Notes
Special Safety Information and Requirements

1.5.5 FCC and Industry Canada Compliance, U.S. and Canada

This section describes the requirements for compliance with Federal Communications Com-
mission (FCC) Rules and Industry Canada CS-03 standard for HiPath 4000.

1.5.5.1 FCC Registration and Requirements

The following paragraphs describe requirements and information based on FCC rules.
● Service
In case of problems with products in the HiPath 4000 series, contact Siemens customer service
(1-800-TEL-ROLM); here you will receive further information about service and repairs. The
telephone company can ask you to disconnect the equipment from the network until the prob-
lem is corrected or until you are sure that the equipment is not malfunctioning.
● FCC Rules, Part 15
The Siemens HiPath 4000 systems have been tested and comply with the limits for a class A
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide rea-
sonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commer-
cial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harm-
ful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at the user’s
expense.
● FCC Rules, Part 68

FCC Part 68 Registration

The Siemens HiPath 4000 systems comply with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. On the system’s
equipment cover is a label which contains, among other information, the FCC registration num-
ber. If requested, this information must be given to the telephone company.

REN
The "Ringer Equivalence Number, REN" is used to determine the quality of devices which may
be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the
devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of RENs
should not exceed five (5). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a
line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company.

The REN assigned to Siemens HiPath model 4000 systems is 0.4B. If requested,
> this information must be given to the telephone company.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 1-13
montbuch01.fm

Introduction and Important Notes For internal distribution only

Special Safety Information and Requirements

Facility Interface Information

In order to connect registered terminal equipment to the telephone company lines, the terminal
equipment must utilize FCC registered jacks. Standardized jacks are used for this equipment.
The following tables list facility interfaces, manufacturer’s network interface port designations,
RENs or service codes, and network jacks.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
1-14 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch01.fm
For internal distribution only Introduction and Important Notes
Special Safety Information and Requirements

This table lists the network trunk interfaces for loop-start, ground-start and DID services.

Manufacturer Port Facility Interface Code (FIC) REN Network Jack

Identifier
TMC16 O2LS2 0.4 B RJ21X
TMC16 O2GS2 0.4 B RJ21X
TMDID O2RV2-T 0.0 RJ21X
This table provides an overview of the analog station interfaces (PL services).

Manufacturer Port Facility Interface Code (FIC) Service Order Code Network Jack
Identifier (SOC)
SLMA2(OPS) OL13B 9.0 F RJ21X
TMEMUS TL31M 9.0 F RJ2GX
TMEMUS TL31E 9.0 F RJ2GX

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 1-15
montbuch01.fm

Introduction and Important Notes For internal distribution only

Special Safety Information and Requirements

This table lists the network digital trunk interfaces for digital services.

Manufacturer Port Digital Interface Code (FIC) Service Order Code Network Jack
Identifier (SOC)
TMDNH O4DU9-BN 6.0 P NA *
TMDNH O4DU9-DN 6.0 P NA *
TMDNH O4DU9-1KN 6.0 P NA *
TMDNH O4DU9-1SN 6.0 P NA *
* The TMDNH interfaces are connected to the Public Switched Telephone Network through FCC-registered Net-
work Communications Terminated Equipment (NCTE) which specifies the type of network jacks to be used.

This table lists the answer supervision code for network DID interfaces.

Manufacturer Port Facility Interface Code (FIC) Answer Supervision Network Jack
Identifier Code
TMDID O2RV-T AS.2 RJ21X
TMDNH O4DU9-BN AS.2 NA *
TMDNH O4DU9-DN AS.2 NA *
TMDNH O4DU9-1KN AS.2 NA *
TMDNH O4DU9-1SN AS.2 NA *
* The TMDNH interfaces are connected to the Public Switched Telephone Network through FCC-registered Net-
work Communications Terminated Equipment (NCTE) which specifies the type of network jacks to be used.

Disruption of the Network

If the Siemens HiPath 4000 systems disrupt the telephone network, the telephone company
can discontinue your service temporarily. If possible, the telephone company will notify you in
advance. If advance notice is not practical, they will notify you as soon as possible. You are
also informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.

Telephone Company Facility Changes

The telephone company is entitled to adjust its facilities, equipment, operations and procedures
as necessary; such modifications can interfere with the operation of your equipment. If they do,
you should be notified in advance so you have an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted tele-
phone service.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
1-16 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch01.fm
For internal distribution only Introduction and Important Notes
Special Safety Information and Requirements

Nonlive Voice Equipment

Nonlive voice equipment such as music-on-hold devices and recorded announcers for systems
must be approved by Siemens and registered in accordance with the rules and regulations of
Subpart C of the FCC Rules, Part 68, or it must be connected through protective circuitry that
is approved by Siemens and registered in accordance with the rules and regulations in Subpart
C of the FCC Rules, Part 68.

Newly Established Network Area and Exchange Codes

The routing software features, which allows user access to the network, must be upgraded to
recognize newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed in
service.
Failure to upgrade the premises systems or peripheral equipment to recognize the new codes
as they are established restricts the customers and the customer’s employees from gaining ac-
cess to the network and to these codes.

Equipment with Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

Allowing the equipment to be operated in such a manner as to not provide for proper answer
supervision is a violation of Part 68 of the FCC rules.
Proper answer supervision is when:
1. This equipment returns answer supervision to the PSTN when DID calls are:
● Answered by the called station.
● Answered by the attendant.
● Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the CPE user.
● Routed to a dial prompt.
2. This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded to the PSTN. Per-
missible exceptions are:
● A call is unanswered.
● A busy tone is received.
● A reorder tone is received.

Hearing-Aid Compatibility
Telephones for emergency use and telephones installed in common areas such as lobbies,
hospital rooms, elevators, and hotel rooms must have handsets that are compatible with mag-
netically coupled hearing aids. Persons who are not in common areas must also be provided
with hearing-aid compatible handsets, if needed.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 1-17
montbuch01.fm

Introduction and Important Notes For internal distribution only

Special Safety Information and Requirements

The Siemens Optiset E phones for the Siemens HiPath 4000 system are hearing-aid compat-
ible and comply with the FCC Rules, Parts 68.316 and 68.317.

Programmed Dialer Features

When you program emergency numbers or make test calls to emergency numbers using Sie-
mens products with programmed dialer features, stay on the line and briefly explain to the dis-
patcher the reason for the call before hanging up. Perform these activities in off-peak hours,
such as early morning or late evening.

Connecting Off-premises Station Facilities

Customers who intend to connect off-premises station (OPS) facilities must inform the tele-
phone company of the OPS class for which the equipment is registered and the connection de-
sired.

Equal Access Requirements

Call aggregators such as hotels, hospitals, airports, and so on must provide the end-user equal
access codes to the carriers of the user’s choice. The current equal codes are 10XXX, 800, 888
or 950.
The Siemens HiPath 4000 systems are capable of providing users access to interstate provid-
ers of operator services through the use of equal access codes. Modifications by aggregators
to alter these capabilities is a violation of the Telephone Operator Consumer Services Improve-
ment Act of 1990 and Part 68 of the FCC Rules.

Recommendations for Overvoltage Protection

While the Siemens HiPath 4000 systems are fully compliant with FCC rules and regulations, it
is recommended that an alternating current (AC) surge arrestor of the form and capability suit-
able for the model purchased be installed in the AC outlet to which the Siemens HiPath 4000
system is connected. Consult with you distributor as to the surge protector requirements for
your equipment.

1.5.6 Industry Canada Compliance

The following are notices required by Industry Canada Terminal Attachment Program Proce-
dure DC-01(E), Procedure for Declaration of Conformity and Registration of Terminal Equip-
ment, Section 6.4.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
1-18 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch01.fm
For internal distribution only Introduction and Important Notes
Special Safety Information and Requirements

1.5.6.1 Equipment Attachment Limitations

NOTE: This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical
Specification. This is confirmed by the registration number. The abbreviation, IC, before the
registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Confor-
mity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. It does not imply that
Industry Canada approved the equipment.

1.5.6.2 Ringer Equivalence Number (REN)

NOTE: The "Ringer Equivalence Number, REN" for this terminal equipment is 0.4. The REN
assigned to each terminal equipment provides an indication of the maximum number of termi-
nals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may
consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer
Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed five.

1.5.7 Related Information, United States

Related publications include the following manuals and guides:

With the exception of the Installation Instructions, these manuals are only available
> in German and in English.

● HiPath 4000 V4.0 CorNet Reference Manual

● HiPath 4000 Manager V4.0 Installation and Service Manual
● HiPath 4000 V4.0 Conversion Manual/Upgrade Manual
● HiPath 4000 V4.0 Customer Site Planning Guide and Power and Grounding Specifications
● HiPath 4000 V4.0 Installation Instructions
● HiPath 4000 V4.0Service Manual
● HiPath 4000 V4.0 Network Planning Guide
● HiPath ProCenter Standard and Advanced Installation Guide

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 1-19
montbuch01.fm

Introduction and Important Notes For internal distribution only

Data Protection and Data Security

1.6 Data Protection and Data Security

This system processes and uses personal data for purposes such as call detail recording,
displays, and customer data acquisition.

In Germany, the processing and use of such data is subject to various regulations, including
those of the Federal Data Protection Law (Bundesdatenschutzgesetz, BDSG). For other
countries, please follow the appropriate national laws.
The aim of data protection is to protect the rights of individuals from being adversely affected
by use of their personal data.
In addition, the aim of data protection is to prevent the misuse of data when it is processed and
to ensure that one’s own interests and the interests of other parties which need to be protected
are not affected.
Employees of Siemens AG are bound to safeguard trade secrets and personal data under the
terms of the company’s work rules.
In order to ensure that the statutory requirements are consistently met during service – whether
on-site or remote – you should always observe the following rules. You will not only protect the
interests of your and our customers, you will also avoid personal consequences.
A conscientious and responsible approach helps protect data and ensure privacy:
● Ensure that only authorized persons have access to customer data.
● Take full advantage of password assignment options. Never give passwords to an
unauthorized person orally or in writing.
● Ensure that no unauthorized person is able to process (store, modify, transmit, disable,
delete) or use customer data in any way.
● Prevent unauthorized persons from gaining access to storage media, such as backup
diskettes or log printouts. This applies to service calls as well as storage and transport.
● Ensure that storage media which are no longer required are completely destroyed. Ensure
that no sensitive documents are left unprotected.
Work closely with your customer contact; this promotes trust and reduces your
workload.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
1-20 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch01.fm
For internal distribution only Introduction and Important Notes
Documentation Feedback

1.7 Documentation Feedback

To report a problem with this document, call your next level of support:
● Siemens employees should call the National Support Center.
● Customers should call the Siemens Customer Support Center.
When you call, be sure the following information is available. This will help identify which doc-
ument you are having problems with.

Example:
● Title: HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
● Order Number: P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 1-21
montbuch01.fm

Introduction and Important Notes For internal distribution only

Documentation Feedback

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
1-22 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch02.fm
For internal distribution only Overview

2 Overview
This chapter provides an overview of the major system functions and components of HiPath
4000.

2.1 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2.1.1 AC-powered, Nonredundant HiPath 4000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.1.1 CSPCI Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.1.1.2 Duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.1.3 Mono. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.1.1.4 LTUW Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.1.2 AC-powered, Redundant HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.1.3 DC-powered, Redundant HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.1.4 AP 3700 Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.1.5 Survivability Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.2 Switching Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.2.1 Common Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.2.2 Switching Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.2.3 Service Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.3 Telephony Shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.4 External Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.4.1 Administrative Data Processor (ADP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.4.1.1 System Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.4.1.2 Direct AMO Dialog (DAD) Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.4.1.3 Remote Maintenance and Administration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.4.1.4 Local Maintenance Terminal Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.1.5 Call Detail Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.1.6 Traffic Metering and Statistics Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.1.7 System Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.1.8 RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.1.9 HSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.5 Internal Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.5.1 Internal Server Common Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
This manual describes the installation of the HiPath 4000. HiPath 4000 IP provides custom
convergence applications and multimedia communications solutions from workstation to work-
station.
The HiPath 4000 supports up to 15 directly connected access points and 83 additional access
points distributed over IP.
The HiPath 4000 system is designed as a free-standing system. The number of cabinets in-
stalled in the HiPath 4000 depends on the customer configuration.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 2-1
montbuch02.fm

Overview For internal distribution only

System Configuration

2.1 System Configuration

A HiPath 4000 stack consists of:
● 1 central control box CSPCI (Data and Switch Processor for Compact-PCI/LAN). The
CSPCI box can be installed as a standalone unit or separately mounted in a 19" rack.
● 3 line trunk unit cabinets (LTUs) = (3x384 ports)
Stacks 2 through 4 consists of:
● 4 LTUs each (4x384 ports each)
The AC-powered redundant HiPath 4000 has a maximum of two power box (UACD) cabinets.
The DC-powered redundant HiPath 4000 has a maximum of two, 2-stack power box cabinets.
The HiPath 4000 is available in three configurations:
● AC-powered, nonredundant
● AC-powered, redundant
● DC-powered, redundant only

2.1.1 AC-powered, Nonredundant HiPath 4000

The nonredundant AC-powered HiPath 4000 uses AC-to-DC shelf power supplies (LPC80s)
and DC-to-DC shelf power supplies (PSUPs). You can have a maximum of 4 HiPath 4000 cab-
inet stacks (see Figure 2-1 on page 2-3).
The CSPCI box (Data and Switch Processor for Compact-PCI/LAN) is located either in stack 1
of the nonredundant AC-powered HiPath 4000, installed as a standalone unit next to this sys-
tem or separately mounted in a 19" rack. The remaining three shelves are telephony shelves
called line trunk unit wide (LTUW) shelves.
The AC-powered, nonredundant HiPath 4000 allows for a maximum of up to 16,000 ports.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
2-2 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch02.fm
For internal distribution only Overview
System Configuration

Stack 1 Stack 2 Stack 3 Stack 4

LPC80

LPC80

LPC80

LPC80
L80XF L80XF L80XF L80XF
PSUP

PSUP

PSUP

PSUP
LPC80

LPC80

LPC80

LPC80
L80XF L80XF L80XF L80XF
PSUP

PSUP

PSUP

PSUP
LPC80

LPC80

LPC80

LPC80
L80XF L80XF L80XF L80XF
PSUP

PSUP

PSUP

PSUP
LPSUC

LPSUC

LPSUC
CSPCI L80XF L80XF L80XF
PSUP

PSUP

PSUP
Figure 2-1 HiPath 4000, nonredundant power configuration

2.1.1.1 CSPCI Box

The shelf provides power supply and boards in one box.

Warning
7 This is a class A device. This equipment can cause interference in residential areas:
In this case, the operator can be required to take appropriate measures.
The CSPCI box provides switching unit (SWU) and administration and data processor (ADP)
functions.
The SWU provides:
● A common control unit that starts and controls the call processing functions and features
of the system
● A switching network that controls the voice data highways that carry information through
the system
● A service unit that provides ringing, tones, conference call switching, dual-tone multi fre-
quency (DTMF) button signals, and public network dial tones for LTU boards

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 2-3
montbuch02.fm

Overview For internal distribution only

System Configuration

The ADP:
● Places the system into service
● Provides access to system administration, maintenance, and configuration management
operations (Direct AMO Dialog, UBA, HSD or RDS)
● Provides a local maintenance terminal interface
● Provides various administrative reporting and security applications
The CSPCI box is available in two configurations:
● Duplex
● Simplex Mono is not supported in the U.S.

2.1.1.2 Duplex
This configuration has two common controls (CC) and ADP. Each common control is powered
by a separate power supply. The ADP is powered by two power supplies to ensure continuous
operation during failure of one power supply.

SL Modules
OT
6 SF2X8
5 DSCXL (CC-B)
4
3 Fan HDMO/HDCF Fan
2 • DSCXL (CC-A) •
1 DSCXL (ADP) •
PSU (1) PSU (2)
redundant

• -> Basic shelf configuration extended with:

2 x DSCXL:S30810-Q2311-X SF2X8: S30810-Q2309-X
RTM: S30810-Q2312-X

Figure 2-2 CSPCI, duplex configuration

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
2-4 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch02.fm
For internal distribution only Overview
System Configuration

2.1.1.3 Mono
Figure 2-3 on page 2-5 shows the CSPCI simplex configuration (mono).

SL Modules
OT
6
5
4
3 Fan HDMO/HDCF • Fan
2 • •
1 DSCXL (ADP) •
PSU (1) • PSU (2)
redundant

• -> Modules belong to basic shelf configuration:

PSU: ACPCI/DCPCI Fan: C39165-A7050-B13
DSCXL: S30810-Q2311-X RTM: S30810-Q2312-X
HDMO: S30810-Q2310-X MCM: S30810-Q2313-X
HDCF: S30810-K2319-X300

Figure 2-3 CSPCI, simplex configuration (mono)

2.1.1.4 LTUW Shelf

The line trunk unit wide (LTUW) shelf is the new version of the LTUE shelf. It functions as an
interface between the system and the external environment using champ connectors (see Fig-
ure 2-4 on page 2-6). The LTUW shelf is only available with redundant HiPath 4000 AC and DC
systems.
The LTUW shelf provides slots for:
● Two DC-to-DC shelf power supplies (PSUPs)
● 16 Peripheral slots, up to 24 ports in narrowband
● A special slot for RG or peripheral signaling interface unit (SIU)
● An LTUCA board

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 2-5
2-6
16
PSUP PSUP
RG/WG Bulk HTS
Overview

Figure 2-4
montbuch02.fm

19
BG 1 SIVAPAC (MDF)

25
Champ (MDF)
System Configuration

BG 2 SIVAPAC (MDF) 31
Champ (MDF)
BG 3 SIVAPAC (MDF)
37

RGM Champ (MDF)

BG 4 SIVAPAC (MDF)
43

LTUW Backplane
Champ (MDF)
BG 5 SIVAPAC (MDF)
49

Champ (MDF)
BG 6 SIVAPAC (MDF)
55

Champ (MDF)
BG 7 SIVAPAC (MDF)
61

WGM Champ (MDF)

BG 8 SIVAPAC (MDF)
67

Champ (MDF)
LTUC.. board
73
Figure 2-4 shows the connectors on the LTUW backplane.

BG 9 SIVAPAC (MDF)
79

Champ (MDF)
BG 10 SIVAPAC (MDF)
85

Champ (MDF)

BG 15 SIVAPAC (MDF)
Champ (MDF)
BG 16 SIVAPAC (MDF)
115 121

Champ (MDF)
Bulk RG/WG Talk
PSUP PFI PSUP
40000040ger
127

HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions

For internal distribution only

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
 montbuch02.fm
For internal distribution only Overview
System Configuration

2.1.2 AC-powered, Redundant HiPath 4000

The AC-powered, redundant HiPath 4000 configuration consists of up to four HiPath 4000 cab-
inet stacks and a power supply stack with up to two UACDs (unit alternating current distribu-
tion); see Figure 2-5. A 2-cabinet HiPath 4000 cabinet stack receives input power from one
UACD. A third and fourth cabinet stack requires a second UACD, which receives input power
from a wall outlet (U.S.) or a junction box (I.M.).
A fully configured AC-powered, redundant HiPath 4000 can provide up to 16,000 ports, de-
pending on the trunk and subscriber configuration.
The HiPath 4000 system uses SIPAC LTUW shelves. SIPAC and SIVAPAC shelves cannot be
mixed in the same system.
The AC-powered, redundant HiPath 4000 allows for a maximum of up to 16,000 ports.

Stack 1 Stack 2 Stack 3 Stack 4

PSUP

PSUP

PSUP

PSUP
PSUP

PSUP

PSUP

PSUP
LTUW LTUW LTUW LTUW

UACD
PSUP

PSUP

PSUP

PSUP
PSUP

PSUP

PSUP

PSUP
LTUW LTUW LTUW LTUW

UACD 2
PSUP

PSUP

PSUP

PSUP
PSUP

PSUP

PSUP

PSUP
LTUW LTUW LTUW LTUW

UACD 1
PSUP

PSUP

PSUP
PSUP

PSUP

PSUP

CSPCI LTUW LTUW LTUW

Figure 2-5 HiPath 4000, AC-powered, redundant CPU configuration

Physical shelf numbering is consecutive from bottom-to-top in each cabinet. LTUW shelves are
also numbered by logical position. The LTUW logical shelf numbering is consecutive from bot-
tom-to-top and left-to-right in each system.
The cabinet stack layout is as follows:
● Base cabinet: ADP and SWU in a CSPCI box
● All other shelves: LTUW shelves

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 2-7
montbuch02.fm

Overview For internal distribution only

System Configuration

2.1.3 DC-powered, Redundant HiPath 4000

The DC-powered HiPath 4000 is available in a redundant configuration only. It consists of up
to four HiPath 4000 cabinet stacks and up to two power supply stacks with as many as four
UDCDs (unit direct current distribution) each; see Figure 2-6. Each DC-powered HiPath 4000
cabinet stack receives input power from one UDCD. The UDCD receives input power from a
DC power system.
A fully configured, DC-powered HiPath 4000 can provide up to 16,000 ports, depending on the
trunk and subscriber configuration.
The HiPath 4000 system uses SIPAC LTUW shelves. SIPAC and SIVAPAC shelves cannot be
mixed in the same system.

Stack 1 Stack 2 Stack 3 Stack 4

PSUP PSUP PSUP

PSUP PSUP PSUP PSUP

PSUP PSUP PSUP PSUP

PSUP PSUP PSUP PSUP

PSUP PSUP PSUP

PSUP PSUP PSUP PSUP

PSUP PSUP PSUP PSUP

PSUP PSUP PSUP PSUP

LTUW LTUW LTUW LTUW
UDCD UDCD

LTUW LTUW LTUW LTUW

UDCD 4 UDCD 2

LTUW LTUW LTUW LTUW

UDCD 3 UDCD 1
CSPCI LTUW LTUW LTUW

Figure 2-6 HiPath 4000, DC-powered, cabinet layout

Physical shelf numbering is consecutive from bottom-to-top in each cabinet. LTUW shelves are
also numbered by logical position. The LTUW logical shelf numbering is consecutive from bot-
tom-to-top and left-to-right in each system.
The cabinet stack layout is as follows:
● Base cabinet: ADP and SWU in a CSPCI box
● All other shelves: LTUW shelves

2.1.4 AP 3700 Cabinets

With HiPath 4000 V2.0, new 19" shelves (AP 3700-9/AP 3700-13) are used for system expan-
sion. These 19" shelves can be used in a 19" cabinet or standalone (see Figure 2-7).

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
2-8 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch02.fm
For internal distribution only Overview
System Configuration

AP 3700-9 (9 slots) in
19" cabinet or
standalone

HiPath 4000 V4.0 AP3700-9 *-G5412-X

N CSAPE
C
S U x
UP/UPR 3 T I C
(L80XF M 4 P
I C
/LTUW) I
4
LUNA LUNA LUNA
2 2 2
UP/UPR 2
(L80XF/LTUW)

UP/UPR 1
(L80XF/LTUW) AP 3700-13 (13 slots) only in
19" cabinet
UCS
CSPCI
RTM AP3700-13 *-G5413-X
l
T
U
C
A

LUNA LUNA LUNA LUNA

2 2 2 2

Figure 2-7 AP 3700 connections

2.1.5 Survivability Server

Survivability Server takes over operation of the access points if central control fails. It can only
be used in AP 3700 IP access points.
However, Survivability Server can control all types of access points (AP 3300 IP, AP 3500 IP,
AP 3700 IP) in emergency mode - regardless of whether the access points are equipped with
NCUI(1) or NCUI.
Survivability Server consists of a cassette with a cPCI backplane, DSCXL processor, HDMO/
HDCF module, power supply unit and redundant fan trays.
Depending on the power supply module used, it can be operated with an 110/230V AC or 48 V
DC supply.
In AP 3700 IP, there is no electrical connection between the access point and the server.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 2-9
montbuch02.fm

Overview For internal distribution only

System Configuration

The Survivability Server and NCUI of the same access point communicate with each other ex-
clusively via the IP network (see also the service manual for "HiPath 4000 V4.0 IP Solutions,
IPDA&APE").
Figure 2-8 shows the Survivability Server slide-in shelf.

Fan tray

Power supply mod-

ule

DSCXL board

HDMO or HDCF board

Fan tray

Figure 2-8 Survivability Server slide-in shelf

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
2-10 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch02.fm
For internal distribution only Overview
Switching Units

2.2 Switching Units

The switching unit (SWU) consists of a common control unit function, a switching network func-
tion, and a service unit function.
The HiPath 4000’s SWU functionality is implemented in the DSCXL board. The DSCXL board
acts as common control unit and provides switching network and service unit functions, and
Siemens LAN connectivity, through the SL200 board.

This 2-board set also provides the ADP functions.

>
2.2.1 Common Control Units
The common control unit performs and controls the call processing functions and features of
the system. These functions are distributed among the various hardware subcomponents in the
common control cabinet.
The HiPath 4000 SWU common control subcomponents are:
● DSCXL board (data processor controller 586) with LAN and 256 MB of dynamic memory
● RTM board as interface between LTU and processor shelves
● Clock generator function included on the RTM board (memory time switch with clock gen-
erator MTSCG)
● SF2x8 board for LAN connections

2.2.2 Switching Networks

The switching network is a time-division switching matrix that controls the voice data highways
that carry the flow of information through the system. Voice data highways provide the commu-
nication channels between the switching network, the telephony shelves, and the service unit.
The memory time switch section of the RTM board performs the switching network function in
a HiPath 4000 system. In large systems the signaling interface and conference expanded (SI-
COE) board provides additional memory time switching functionality.
The SWU DSXCL board and common control boards control the RTM board over the multibus.

2.2.3 Service Units

The service unit function provides ringing, tones, conference call switching, dual-tone multifre-
quency (DTMF) button signals, and public network dial tones for telephony boards.
The service unit functions in a HiPath 4000 are distributed among the following:

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 2-11
montbuch02.fm

Overview For internal distribution only

Switching Units

● SICOE board
● Signaling interface unit peripheral extended (SIUX2) board
● Ring generator

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
2-12 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch02.fm
For internal distribution only Overview
Telephony Shelves

2.3 Telephony Shelves

Telephony shelves provide the interface between the system and the external environment in-
cluding the following:
● Telephone and maintenance terminal stations
● Trunks and network services (public and private)
● Devices connected to internal servers

Certain devices and applications can be, or must be, directly interfaced to the inter-
> nal or external server. This is accomplished using the DSCXL, HUBC, LAN connec-
tion, SL200, or PSIO board. Refer to the HiPath 4000 Service Manual for additional
information about these boards.
Type of telephony cabinet:
● Internal telephony cabinet—L80XF or LTUW cabinet
The functional components of the L80XF or LTUW cabinets consists of:
– LTUCA board (Line Trunk Unit Controller Advanced)
– Subscriber-line module boards
– Trunk module boards
– LTU signal cables

2.4 External Servers

The HiPath 4000 applications operate in dedicated internal or external servers, allowing the
SWU to be dedicated to call processing services. Internal servers always reside in the CSPCI
boxes. External servers reside outside the cabinets. Refer to Table 2-1 on page 2-13 for an
overview of the server types and the applicable applications.

Server Types
applications Administrative Data External
Processor (ADP) Server
Administration and X
Data Processor
PhoneMail X
Xpressions X
CallBridge X
Table 2-1 Server types and applications overview (Sheet 1 of 2)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 2-13
montbuch02.fm

Overview For internal distribution only

External Servers

Server Types
applications Administrative Data External
Processor (ADP) Server
HiPath 4000 Manager X
HiPath ProCenter Standard and Advanced X
Hicom Trading System X
Table 2-1 Server types and applications overview (Sheet 2 of 2)

2.4.1 Administrative Data Processor (ADP)

The ADP is the primary internal server and is a mandatory component of all systems. Its main
function is administration and maintenance of the system.
The standard functions of the ADP are:
● System startup
● Direct AMO dialog (DAD) access for configuration administration
● Remote maintenance administration (RMA)
● Local maintenance terminal interface
● Call Detail Recording
● Traffic metering and statistics

2.4.1.1 System Startup

The ADP is responsible for commissioning (placing into service) the system.
The commissioning sequence occurs after powering on a system and after a software- or hard-
ware-initiated system restart (reload or hard restart only).
The ADP also reloads flashware and loadware on a subsystem level (ADP, SWU, and ACD
secondary server) and an individual module level (after deactivation and activation of boards).

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
2-14 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch02.fm
For internal distribution only Overview
External Servers

The commissioning sequence is as follows:

● Startup of ADP:
– Loading ADP common control unit flashware
– Loading ADP common control unit software
– Starting basic operation of ADP common control unit
– Initializing the ADP interface ports
– Loading the ADP interface ports
– Starting the ADP interface ports
● Startup of switching unit:
– Loading SWU flashware
– Loading SWU software
– Starting basic operation of the SWU
– Copying Unixware command file for database
– Generating the database
– Loading the loadware on telephony boards
– Starting telephony boards
– Starting the call processing operation

2.4.1.2 Direct AMO Dialog (DAD) Access

The HiPath 4000 Manager provides direct command line access for administration and trou-
bleshooting configuration and system problems.

2.4.1.3 Remote Maintenance and Administration

The Unixware-based RMA application provides major and minor alarm reporting.
RMA requires a CCA II (asynchronous) modem to support the following:
● To report major system outages to the RMA catcher and for remote terminal access to the
system
● To report major and minor alarms to the RMA catcher

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 2-15
montbuch02.fm

Overview For internal distribution only

Internal Servers

2.4.1.4 Local Maintenance Terminal Interface

This interface provides for the physical connection of a maintenance terminal to the ADP and
access to Unixware applications.

2.4.1.5 Call Detail Recording

CDR provides traffic statistics for monitoring system activity and evaluating system perfor-
mance. CDR statistics can also be used by the traffic metering and statistics application.

2.4.1.6 Traffic Metering and Statistics Application

This program is a Unixware-based application that analyzes system performance and gener-
ates tabular data for evaluating and optimizing system resources.

2.4.1.7 System Security

Application software in the ADP provides for system security. The system administrator uses
the software to assign user passwords and control the access level of those passwords. This
prevents unauthorized access to the system and to critical system files, databases, and admin-
istration or maintenance facilities.

2.4.1.8 RDS
Realtime Diagnostics System (RDS), formerly trunk diagnostics system (TDS), is a diagnostic
tool that provides telephony fault localization for station and data lines and limited trunk fault
reporting capabilities for trunk facility problems. It provides tools and features that allow you to
solve line and trunk problems more efficiently

2.4.1.9 HSD
The hardware and symptom diagnosis (HSD) tool is a browser-based application that resides
on the Primergy server. HSD functionality consists of menu choices within the HiPath 4000
Manager client application. HSD can be used either remotely or locally. It is designed to im-
prove usability, reduce service time, reduce cost, and enhance serviceability.

2.5 Internal Servers

Internal servers are optionally available in all HiPath 4000 systems. The internal servers are
configured in the DSCXL board.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
2-16 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch02.fm
For internal distribution only Overview
Internal Servers

2.5.1 Internal Server Common Control Unit

The internal server common control unit administers and controls the functions and features of
the application software running on the internal server. It consists of the following subcompo-
nents:
– DSCXL board
– SF2x8 board
Each of the common control unit boards interface with one another over the multibus/PCI bus.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 2-17
montbuch02.fm

Overview For internal distribution only

Internal Servers

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
2-18 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch03.fm
For internal distribution only Preparing for Installation
Installation Procedures Matrix

3 Preparing for Installation

The following information should be noted when building cabinets with the main distribution
frame.

3.1 Installation Procedures Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.2 Installation Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3 Conducting the Site Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.4 Receiving the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.5 Inspecting for Shipping Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.6 Removing the System from its Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.7 Unloading a System with a Roller Base from the Pallet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.8 Positioning the Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.9 Leveling the Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.10 Removing the Front Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.11 Important Labels on the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.12 Inventorying the System Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.13 Inventorying the System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.14 Inventorying the Installation Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.15 Pre-Installation Trunk Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.16 Installing Seismic Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.17 Stacking HiPath 4000 Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3.18 Installing the Cable Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

3.1 Installation Procedures Matrix

This section provides an installation matrix for use when installing the HiPath 4000. Check off
each step as you finish performing each task. Some steps can be omitted depending on con-
figuration.

Installation Steps Refer to: ✔

1. Prepare for installation

a) Installation materials. Section 3.2 on page 3-5
b) Verify the site. Section 3.3 on page 3-6
c) Receive the system. Section 3.4 on page 3-6
d) Inspect for shipping damages. Section 3.5 on page 3-7
e) Remove the system from its packag- Section 3.6 on page 3-7
ing.
Table 3-1 Installation Matrix (Sheet 1 of 4)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 3-1
montbuch03.fm

Preparing for Installation For internal distribution only

Installation Procedures Matrix

Installation Steps Refer to: ✔

f) Remove the system from the pallet. Section 3.7 on page 3-7
g) Position the cabinets. Section 3.8 on page 3-9
h) Level the cabinets. Section 3.9 on page 3-10
i) Remove the front covers. Section 3.10 on page 3-12
j) Remove the back covers. Section 3.10.3 on page 3-14
k) Check and read the labels in the cabi- Section 3.11 on page 3-17
nets.
l) Inventory the system hardware. Section 3.12 on page 3-19
m) Inventory the system software. Section 3.13 on page 3-19
n) Inventory the installation kit. Section 3.14 on page 3-19
o) Perform pre-installation trunk proce- Section 3.15 on page 3-19
dures.
p) Install seismic anchors, if applicable. Section 3.16 on page 3-20
q) Install the cable channels. Section 3.18 on page 3-23
2. Ground the HiPath 4000.
a) Ground the MDF, I.M. Section 6.1 on page 6-1
b) Connect and ground the cabinets. Section 6.2 on page 6-2
c) Ground the system. Section 6.3 on page 6-5
Section 6.4 on page 6-6
3. Connect the power supply.
a) Connect to the mains. Section 7.1 on page 7-3
b) Install a three-phase connection. Section 7.2 on page 7-9
c) Install a single-phase connection. Section 7.3 on page 7-10
d) Install a three-phase or single-phase Section 7.5 on page 7-12
connection with mid-point grounding.
e) Connect the battery to the power Box, Section 7.13.1 on page 7-29
I.M.
f) Connect the MDF (I.M.). Section 7.1.2 on page 7-8
Section 7.19.1 on page 7-66
g) Connect the power box to the system. Section 7.19 on page 7-65 x
4. Install the signal cables. Section 8.1 on page 8-1
Table 3-1 Installation Matrix (Sheet 2 of 4)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
3-2 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch03.fm
For internal distribution only Preparing for Installation
Installation Procedures Matrix

Installation Steps Refer to: ✔

5. Connect to the LAN. Section 8.2 on page 8-5

6. Install the service alarm cable and trunk by- Section 8.3 on page 8-6
pass.
7. Install the external cables. Chapter 9, “External Cabling Assem-
blies”
8. Install the peripheral equipment, if applica- Chapter 10, “Installing Peripheral x
ble. Equipment”
9. Install the IPDA, if applicable. Chapter 11, “Installing the IPDA”
10. Start the system.
a) Perform pre-power-on checks. Section 12.2 on page 12-2
b) Apply power to the HiPath 4000. Section 12.3 on page 12-3
Section 12.4 on page 12-4
Section 12.5 on page 12-5
Section 12.6 on page 12-6
Section 12.8 on page 12-9
c) Install PROCOMM PLUS, if applicable. Section 12.10 on page 12-9
d) Enable the clock batteries. Section 12.11 on page 12-10
e) Set the date and time. Section 12.12 on page 12-10
f) Install the database. Section 12.13 on page 12-11
g) Start the HiPath 4000. Section 12.14 on page 12-14
h) Connect to the maintenance terminal. Section 12.15 on page 12-15
i) Replace the covers. Section 12.16 on page 12-17
11. Verify the System.
a) Check the boards. Section 13.2 on page 13-2
b) Check the cables. Section 13.3 on page 13-2
c) Verify the AC4. Section 13.4 on page 13-2
d) Test the maintenance terminal for the Section 13.5 on page 13-5
blind.
e) Check and test the features. Section 13.6 on page 13-6
f) Test the restart and failure transfer Section 13.7 on page 13-6
function.
g) Backup the customer data. Section 13.8 on page 13-7
h) Set and activate the HTS function. Section 13.9 on page 13-7
Table 3-1 Installation Matrix (Sheet 3 of 4)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 3-3
montbuch03.fm

Preparing for Installation For internal distribution only

Installation Procedures Matrix

Installation Steps Refer to: ✔

i) Verify the ring generator. Section 13.10 on page 13-8

j) Verify the station-to-MDF connections. Section 13.11 on page 13-8
k) Verify transmission facilities. Section 13.12 on page 13-8
l) Verify the MO disk. Section 13.13 on page 13-18 x
m) Verify the hard disk. Section 13.14 on page 13-18 x
n) Verify the operation of system features Section 13.15 on page 13-20 x
and servers.
o) Verify the system bypass Section 13.16 on page 13-23 x
Table 3-1 Installation Matrix (Sheet 4 of 4)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
3-4 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch03.fm
For internal distribution only Preparing for Installation
Installation Materials

3.2 Installation Materials

The installation materials used to build your system are provided in the system assignment list.
This list is produced on a customer-specific basis and is supplied with the system. Table 3-2
lists the standard tools that are used in installing the HiPath 4000.

Tools Size
Allen key wrenches Complete set
Cable stripper
Channel lock pliers, large
Communication technician’s pliers
Compass saw
Cross-head screwdriver (Phillips screwdriver in the U.S.)
Diagonal cutting pliers
Drill
Gloves
Hammer 400 g
Insertion tool (board removal and replacement tool in the U.S.)
Level
Meter stick (yardstick in the U.S.)
Module key (board removal and replacement tool in the U.S.)
Ring or flat spanners (open-ended socket wrench in the U.S.) 8 mm to 19 mm (.3 to .7 in)
Socket spanner set (socket wrench in the U.S.) 10 mm to 19 mm (.4 in to .7
in)
Screwdrivers 2 mm to 8 mm
In the U.S.: Phillips (no. 2
and no. 3) and flat-blade
(3/16 inch by 4 inch)
Seismic anchor kit (if applicable)
Side cutter
Soldering iron
Spirit level (level in the U.S.)
Stripping knife
Telephone pliers (long-nose pliers)
Table 3-2 Standard Installation Tools (Sheet 1 of 2)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 3-5
montbuch03.fm

Preparing for Installation For internal distribution only

Conducting the Site Verification

Tools Size
Terminal crimping pliers (crimpers in the U.S.) Up to 50 mm (2 in)
Torx screwdrivers Complete set
Wrench, hex key, 6 mm
Wrench, hex socket, 7/32 inch
Wrist band and conductive pad (ESD equipment in the U.S.)
Table 3-2 Standard Installation Tools (Sheet 2 of 2)

Check your tools regularly. Only use intact tools.

>
The following tools are required for pre-installation tasks:
● Scissors
● Screwdriver, flat-blade 3/16 inch by 4 inches
● Screwdriver, Phillips no. 3
● Wrench, 8-inch adjustable
● Wrench, 10-mm hex socket
● Wrench, 9/16-inch hex socket

3.3 Conducting the Site Verification

Arrange for a qualified electrical contractor to conduct a walk-through with you and check the
site for customer compliance to site engineering conditions, including power and grounding,
cabinet and peripheral space allocations and safety requirements. In the U.S., customer site
requirements are specified in the following documents:
● Site map
● Siemens HiPath 4000 V4.0, Customer Site Planning Guide and Power and Grounding
Guide and Specifications.

3.4 Receiving the System

On delivery to customer facilities, the following components are already installed: modules,
power supplies, MO disk drive and hard disks. The packing list, bill of materials, and hardware
map are also shipped with the system.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
3-6 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch03.fm
For internal distribution only Preparing for Installation
Inspecting for Shipping Damage

3.5 Inspecting for Shipping Damage

Before accepting the delivery of any equipment:
1. List any obvious external damage on the shipping documents, then ask the delivery per-
sonnel to sign the documents.
2. Handle any damage according to local procedures.

3.6 Removing the System from its Packaging

Warning
7 Never attempt to lift heavy objects without help.

To remove the system from its packaging:

1. Cut and dispose the pallet strapping.
2. Remove and dispose of packing materials.
3. Examine the system for damages during transportation.
4. Record and report any damages according to local procedures or the appropriate service
center.

Danger
7 Immediately replace the power supply cable if it shows any signs of damage, as well
as any damaged safety facilities (covers, stickers, and grounding wires).

3.7 Unloading a System with a Roller Base from the Pallet

Place the pallet as close to the equipment room as possible before removing the
> cabinet.

To remove a system with a roller base from the pallet (see Figure 3-1 on page 3-8):
1. At the base of the cabinet, remove the screws on the left and right sides of the pallet.
2. Tilt the system slightly to one side (1) and slide out the crosspiece (2). Repeat this proce-
dure on the other side.
3. Push the two boards to the middle (3) and slide them out (4).
4. Place the system at the designated installation location.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 3-7
montbuch03.fm

Preparing for Installation For internal distribution only

Unloading a System with a Roller Base from the Pallet

5. Secure the casters (5) by pressing the caster locks downwards.

Warning
7 Secure all four casters (only for a 3 or 4-cabinet system) to prevent the system from
rolling away. Lock the rollers once the system is installed or moved.

5
4 3

Figure 3-1 Removing the Pallet (System with a Roller Base)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
3-8 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch03.fm
For internal distribution only Preparing for Installation
Positioning the Cabinets

3.8 Positioning the Cabinets

In multicabinet systems, position cabinet 1 in the equipment room first, then position the addi-
tional cabinets.
To position the cabinet in the equipment room:
1. Unlock the casters by lifting the caster locks upwards on the cabinet leveling assembly
(see Figure 3-2).
2. Roll the cabinet into the location specified by the equipment room floor plan.
3. Lock the casters by pushing the lock on the cabinet leveling assembly downwards.

To unlock

To lock

Figure 3-2 Caster Locks

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 3-9
montbuch03.fm

Preparing for Installation For internal distribution only

Leveling the Cabinets

3.9 Leveling the Cabinets

3.9.1 Leveling a Roller Base

To level the cabinets (see Figure 3-3):
1. Use a wrench to loosen the lock nut on the caster (1).
2. Use the Allen wrench to adjust the height of the caster (2).
3. Once the height is adjusted, tighten the lock nuts.

1 2

Figure 3-3 Leveling the Casters

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
3-10 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch03.fm
For internal distribution only Preparing for Installation
Leveling the Cabinets

3.9.2 Leveling an AP 3700-9 (Standalone)

This procedure applies only for the AP3700-9. The AP3700-13 cabinet should only
> be installed in a 19" shelf and is not intended for standalone installation.

To level the cabinet (see Figure 3-4):

1. Use a wrench to loosen the lock nut (1) on the caster.
2. Adjust the height of the foot by turning the wrench (2) left or right.
3. Once the height is adjusted, tighten the lock nut (1).

1
2
Figure 3-4 Leveling the Feet

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 3-11
montbuch03.fm

Preparing for Installation For internal distribution only

Removing the Front Covers

3.10 Removing the Front Covers

3.10.1 AP 3300 Front Covers

To remove the front covers in a HiPath 4000:
1. Find the two slots under the front cover (see arrows under the front cover on Figure 3-5).).
2. Insert a 5/8-in. (or smaller) flat-blade screwdriver into each of the two slots and push hard
(until you hear a click) to release the cover.

Slot Slot

Figure 3-5 Removing Front Covers (1 of 2)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
3-12 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch03.fm
For internal distribution only Preparing for Installation
Removing the Front Covers

3. Pull the bottom part of the front cover away from the cabinet and lift upwards (see Figure
3-6).
4. Place the cover in a safe location.

Figure 3-6 Removing the Covers (2 of 2)

3.10.2 AP 3700 Front Covers

The covers are only used with the standalone version (AP3700-9). These covers are only
snapped into guide slots in the housing. They can easily be removed by pulling them toward
the front (see Figure 3-7 on page 3-14).
The back covers can be removed in the same way, by pulling them toward the back.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 3-13
montbuch03.fm

Preparing for Installation For internal distribution only

Removing the Front Covers

Figure 3-7 Removing the AP 3700-9 cover

3.10.3 AP 3300 Back Covers

To remove the back covers:
1. At the top of the cabinet, remove the screw on the top cover with a flat-blade screwdriver
(see Figure 3-8 on page 3-15 and Figure 3-9 on page 3-16).
2. Using two hands, lift the cover upwards to disengage it from the cabinet frame mounting
bracket.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
3-14 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch03.fm
For internal distribution only Preparing for Installation
Removing the Front Covers

Screw

Cover latches

Cabinet frame
mounting bracket

Figure 3-8 Removing the Back Cover

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 3-15
montbuch03.fm

Preparing for Installation For internal distribution only

Removing the Front Covers

2 3
1

Figure 3-9 Removing the Back Cover of a Base Cabinet

3. If the system contains multiple cabinets, remove the remaining covers from the lower cab-
inets by following step 2 (see Figure 3-10).
4. Place the cover in a safe location.

Figure 3-10 Removing the Back Cover of the Lower Cabinet

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
3-16 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch03.fm
For internal distribution only Preparing for Installation
Important Labels on the System

3.11 Important Labels on the System

Upon removing the covers, pay attention to the labels that are on the system (see Figure 3-11,
Figure 3-12 on page 3-17, and Figure 3-13 on page 3-18).

MULTIPLE SOURCES OF POWER

! Refer to service Manual

before removing covers.

Figure 3-11 Cover Label

WARNING
HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT
Earth Connection Required
Before Connecting Supply

! AVERTISSEMENT
COURANT DE FUITE ELEVE
Raccordement a la terre
indispensable avant
le raccordement au reseau

Figure 3-12 High Leakage Current Label

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 3-17
montbuch03.fm

Preparing for Installation For internal distribution only

Important Labels on the System

4000. AC 4000. DC

Back Back
Front Front

HiPath 4000 series Compliance High Leakage Current

Compliance labels V32905-B22-X107, Label
4000 AC nonredundant, V32905-B23-X204,
1 per stack
V32905-B22-X106, 1
per stack

MSOP
UACD Compliance V32905-B23-X201 UDCD
V32905-B22-X111 with second stack

MSOP
V32905-B23-X201 Compliance
with second cabinet V32905-B22-X108

40000120ger2

Figure 3-13 Locations of the Labels on the System

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
3-18 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch03.fm
For internal distribution only Preparing for Installation
Inventorying the System Hardware

3.12 Inventorying the System Hardware

To verify each cabinet hardware
1. Compare the hardware in the cabinet against the packing slip, bill of materials, and hard-
ware map.
2. Handle any discrepancies according to local procedures and record them on the Installa-
tion Report form.

3.13 Inventorying the System Software

The system hard disk contains the latest correction version (KV) load or system call processing
software along with the RMX and Unixware operating system.
A backup software (customer database) is supplied in the MO drive.

3.14 Inventorying the Installation Kit

An installation kit is shipped with each system.

>
To inventory the installation kit, refer to the packing list that accompanies the system.

3.15 Pre-Installation Trunk Procedures

To prepare for trunk installation:
1. Obtain the following trunk information from the facility provider:
● Trunk installation schedule of the Facility provider
● Grade of service to be delivered
● Trunk circuit identification—this identifies the trunk circuit to the telephone company
● RJ21X pin assignments
● Maintenance limits

The facility provider has maintenance limits that determine how much the circuit
> loss can vary before the facility provider responds to correct it.

2. Confirm with the facility provider coordinator that all trunk testing has been scheduled with
the telephone company or vendor.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 3-19
montbuch03.fm

Preparing for Installation For internal distribution only

Installing Seismic Anchors

3.16 Installing Seismic Anchors

Depending on the regulations in your state or country, you may be required to install seismic
anchors. Consult your facility’s technical personnel if your installation requires seismic anchors;
refer to the procedure described below.
The following information about installation of seismic anchors is based on the 2001 California
Building Code.
To install the seismic anchors:
1. Ensure that the earthquake kits are supported on a floor located at or below grade level of
the building.
2. Ensure that a qualified engineer reviews the anchorage and adequacy of the floor for the
following conditions:
● The concrete is normal weight stone aggregate concrete with a compressive strength
of a least 2,000 psi.
● If on-site concrete specifications are not available, strength is determined by testing
cores, if required by OSHPD.
● The floor slab is at least 4 inches thick and capable of supporting loads imposed by
the equipment.
● Drilled-in anchors must be used on prestressed concrete floors (pre- or post-ten-
sioned) unless tension wires are positively located (refer to step 5).
3. Install the anchors in accordance with applicable provisions of the International Confer-
ence of Building Officials (ICBO) Evaluation Report and manufacturer’s recommendations
(refer to Fischerwerke Artur Fischer GMBH & Co. KG, D-72178 Tumlingen, Waldachtal,
Germany).
4. Perform a load test of 50% of the anchors in accordance with the California Department of
General Services, Division of State Architect, Interpretation of Regulations Document i! 19-
1, September 1, 1999 (reference, Expansion Bolts or Epoxy Type Anchors in Concrete).
There are two methods for load testing the anchors:
Hydraulic Ram Method—the test load for the 12 mm anchors in tension is 3200 lbs.
Torque Wrench Method—the installation torque is 35 ft-lbs according to manufacturer’s
specifications. The test torque must be reached within one-half turn of the nut. Torque test-
ing can occur on an individual basis if test procedures have been submitted to and ap-
proved by OSHPD.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
3-20 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch03.fm
For internal distribution only Preparing for Installation
Stacking HiPath 4000 Cabinets

5.

Warning
7 Use extreme care and caution when you install drilled-in anchors in existing non-pre-
stressed reinforced concrete to avoid cutting or damaging the existing reinforcing
bars and tension wires during installation.

When installing drilled-in anchors into existing pre-stressed concrete (pre- or post-ten-
sioned), locate the prestressed tendons by using non-destructive methods before installa-
tion.
6. Maintain a minimum clearance of one inch between the reinforcement and the drilled-in an-
chor.
7. The M8 high-strength bolts that connect the bracket to the cabinet frame are Grade 5.
Tighten the bolts to 35-40 ft-lbs. to ensure that they do not slip in the slotted holes.

3.17 Stacking HiPath 4000 Cabinets

The factory ships the HiPath 4000 cabinets already stacked according to configuration of the
system that has been ordered (see Figure 3-14 on page 3-22 for an example).
To add cabinets to the system, refer to Chapter 14, “Adding Cabinets to the System”.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 3-21
montbuch03.fm

Preparing for Installation For internal distribution only

Stacking HiPath 4000 Cabinets

SIEMENS

HiPath 4000

Figure 3-14 HiPath 4000 Stacked Cabinets (Front View)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
3-22 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch03.fm
For internal distribution only Preparing for Installation
Installing the Cable Channels

3.18 Installing the Cable Channels

To install the cable channels:
1. At the back of the base cabinet, place the cable channel against the cabinet as shown in
Figure 3-15.
2. Secure the cable channels with screws.

Screw loca-
Screw loca- tion
tion

Cable
channels

Screw loca-
tion

Figure 3-15 Cable Channels

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 3-23
montbuch03.fm

Preparing for Installation For internal distribution only

Installing the Cable Channels

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
3-24 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch04.fm
For internal distribution only Special Installation Notes
Removing 24-Port Boards

4 Special Installation Notes

This chapter provides special instructions about installing the HiPath 4000.

4.1 Removing 24-Port Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1.1 SIVAPAC-to-SIPAC Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.1 SIVAPAC-to-SIPAC Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.2 Installing the Adapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2 Network Strips, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.1 Installing 16DA Splitting Strips on a New Main Distribution Frame, I.M.. . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.2 Installing 24DA Splitting Strips on an Old Main Distribution Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.3 Installing AP 3700 Cabinets in 19-Inch Cabinets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.4 Shielding Connection on the Opening of the LTU Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

4.1 Removing 24-Port Boards

Always follow the electrostatic discharge (ESD) prevention procedure when you remove and
replace boards. Failure to follow ESD prevention procedures can result in permanent or inter-
mittent board failures. Refer to the HiPath 4000 V1.0 Service Manual for step-by-step ESD pre-
vention procedures.

Warning: Static Sensitive Devices

4 Follow the electrostatic discharge prevention procedures.

Caution
7 To protect the static sensitive components:
● Always put on the ESD wrist strap on your bare wrist before you touch any of
the boards or assemblies.
● Only transport the boards in ESD protective packaging.
● Always place and work with the boards on a grounded conductive pad.

DANGER
1 To avoid electrical shock, never wear the ESD wrist strap while working on the pow-
er system or at the back of the cabinet. Danger of electric shock!

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 4-1
montbuch04.fm

Special Installation Notes For internal distribution only

Removing 24-Port Boards

To remove or install boards:

1. Only use the supplied board removal and replacement tool (see Figure 4-1).
2. Refer to the markings on the board removal and replacement tool for instructions on how
to use it.

Removing the Board Installing the Board

Figure 4-1 Removing and Installing the Board

4.1.1 SIVAPAC-to-SIPAC Adapter

A SIVAPAC-to-SIPAC board adapter (Adapter 1) is used to adapt 16-port boards with SIVAPAC
connectors to shelves with SIPAC connectors.
The installed Adapter 1 makes the 16-port boards protrude from the shelf, a little farther than
the 24-port boards. To lock the 16-port boards into position, special latches are provided above
(black) and below (gray) the shelf. When the adapters are installed, only the gray latches lock
into place.

The Adapter 1 has three pieces: one power-up module and two adapter modules
> (see Figure 4-3 on page 4-4).
Once installed, never remove the board adapters.
You must install the 16-port adapters manually, as they cannot be installed using the
board removal and replacement tool. You cannot use this tool to seat boards with
gray latches into place. To remove the boards, follow the instructions in Section 4.1,
“Removing 24-Port Boards”.
To install the board adapter (see Figure 4-2 on page 4-3 and Figure 4-3 on page 4-4):
1. Release the gray latch in front of the board.
2. Remove the board from the shelf.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
4-2 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch04.fm
For internal distribution only Special Installation Notes
Removing 24-Port Boards

3. Face the backplane connector of the board toward yourself.

4. On the adapter module (labeled 1 and 2), slightly pull the catch hooks apart.
5. Position the adapter module over the backplane connector of the board.
6. Ensure that the outer edge of each adapter module corresponds with each outer edge of
the board.
7. Ensure that each adapter module’s outermost row of pins is aligned with the outermost row
of the board connector, then insert the module into the connector.
8. Snap on the catch hooks.
9. Install the other module onto the board connect.

If the clearance between the board connector and the hot plug connector on the
> board is not sufficient for the module catch hook, loosen the two hot plug con-
nector screws on the back of the board and adjust location to allow the catch
hook to fit between the hot plug and the board connector.
10. Insert the power-up module (3) into the hot plug connector of the board.

1 3 2
Figure 4-2 Installing the SIVAPAC-to-SIPAC Adapter 1 (1 of 2)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 4-3
montbuch04.fm

Special Installation Notes For internal distribution only

Removing 24-Port Boards

Adapter modules

711
RK/9 6
95-B
9228-A1
C3

Power-up module
ter 1
Adap s
en
Siem
Catch hook
711
RK/9 6
195-B
28-A
C392

ter 1
Adap s
en
Siem

Catch hook

Component
side
LEDs

40000038ger

Figure 4-3 Installing the SIVAPAC-to-SIPAC adapter 1 (2 of 2)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
4-4 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch04.fm
For internal distribution only Special Installation Notes
Removing 24-Port Boards

4.1.2 Installing the Adapter 2

An adapter 2 is a SIPAC-to-SIVAPAC board adapter. Use an Adapter 2 to adapt boards with
SIPAC connectors to shelves with SIVAPAC connectors.

The board Adapter 2 comes in three pieces: one power-up module and two adapter
> modules (see Figure 4-3 on page 4-6).
Once installed, never remove the board adapters.
To install the board adapter 2 (see Figure 4-3 on page 4-6):
1. Face the backplane connector of the board toward yourself.
2. Insert the power-up module into the middle section of the backplane connector as shown
in Figure 4-3 on page 4-6.
3. On the adapter module, slightly pull the catch hooks apart.
4. Position the adapter module over the backplane connector of the board. Ensure that the
outer edge of each adapter module corresponds with each outer edge of the board as
shown in Figure 4-3 on page 4-6.
5. Ensure that each adapter module’s outermost row of pins is aligned with the outermost row
of the board connector, then insert the module into the connector.
6. Snap on the catch hooks.
7. If the catch hooks do not correctly lock, the adapter module is incorrectly positioned. Re-
verse the position of the module and repeat the step.
8. Perform steps 3 through 7 for the other adapter module.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 4-5
montbuch04.fm

Special Installation Notes For internal distribution only

Network Strips, I.M.

Adapter modules
512
RK/9 8
195-B
C392
28-A
Power-up module
ter 2
Adap s
To SIVAPAC
Siem
en
backplane
512
RK/9 8
195-B
28-A
C392

ter 2
Adap s
en
Siem
Catch hook

Catch hook

Component
side

LEDs
40000039ger

Figure 4-4 Installing the SIPAC-to-SIVAPAC Board Adapter 2

4.2 Network Strips, I.M.

In HiPath 4000, 24DA network strips, also known as splitting strips are available for the main
distribution frame (MDF) in addition to the existing 16DA splitting strips.

There is a new design of the main distribution frame.

>
This section describes the installation 16DA splitting strips on the new MDF and how to install
the new 24DA splitting strips on the existing main distribution frame (for example, during the
conversion or upgrade of an older system).

4.2.1 Installing 16DA Splitting Strips on a New Main Distribution

Frame, I.M.
To install a 16DA splitting strip on a new main distribution frame (see Figure 4-5):
P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
4-6 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch04.fm
For internal distribution only Special Installation Notes
Network Strips, I.M.

1. Fasten a screw on the left-hand side of the adapter strap (1) to the right-hand side of the
splitting strip.
2. Fasten a screw on the left-hand side of the splitting strip (2) to the main distribution frame
(MDF).
3. Fasten a screw on the right-hand side of the adapter strap (3) to the MDF.

Splitting Strip
MDF MDF

Adapter Strap

2 1 3

Figure 4-5 16DA Splitting Strips on a New Main Distribution Frame, Front View

4.2.2 Installing 24DA Splitting Strips on an Old Main Distribution

Frame
To install a 24DA splitting strip to an old main distribution frame:
1. Fasten a screw on the applicable adapter strap to the left-hand side of the splitting strip, as
shown in Figure 4-6 on page 4-8.
2. Fasten a screw on the second adapter strap to the right-hand side of the splitting strip, as
shown in Figure 4-7 on page 4-8.
3. Fasten a screw on the left-hand side of the pre-assembled splitting strip to the MDF (1) as
shown in Figure 4-8 on page 4-9.
4. Fasten a screw on the right-hand adapter strap of the pre-assembled splitting strip to the
MDF (2).

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 4-7
montbuch04.fm

Special Installation Notes For internal distribution only

Network Strips, I.M.

Figure 4-6 24DA Splitting Strips Adapter Strap, Left

Figure 4-7 24DA Splitting Strip Adapter Strap, Right

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
4-8 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch04.fm
For internal distribution only Special Installation Notes
Network Strips, I.M.

1
2

Figure 4-8 24DA Splitting Strip on an Old Main Distribution Frame

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 4-9
montbuch04.fm

Special Installation Notes For internal distribution only

Installing AP 3700 Cabinets in 19-Inch Cabinets

4.3 Installing AP 3700 Cabinets in 19-Inch Cabinets

When installing a multiple-cabinet system in a 19-inch cabinet, each system cabinet must be
installed one at a time.
The following components are needed for installing a system cabinet:
● Two cabinet-specific bearing elbows with an ultimate load > 40 kg supplied by the 19-inch
cabinet vendor.
● Two support brackets (order number C39165-A7075-D1), included in the system cabinet
scope of delivery.

Bild 4-9 Bearing elbow and support bracket for AP 3700 in the 19-inch cabinet

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
4-10 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch04.fm
For internal distribution only Special Installation Notes
Installing AP 3700 Cabinets in 19-Inch Cabinets

Sequence of installation:
1. Remove all four feet on the system cabinet.
Do this by loosening the lock nuts (1) on the feet (see Chapter 3, “Leveling an AP 3700-9
(Standalone)”) using an open-ended socket wrench (wrench diameter = 13 mm). Turn the
feet completely outwards.
2. Secure both support brackets (A, in Figure 4-9) to the sides of the system box with four of
the screws supplied.
3. Secure a right and left bearing elbow (B, in Figure 4-9) in the 19-inch cabinet with the
screws provided.
4. Lift the system cabinet into the 19-inch cabinet and sit the cabinet on the two bearing el-
bows (B, inFigure 4-9). Push the cabinet into the 19-inch cabinet until the front edge of the
cabinet is flush with the front of the 19-inch frame.

Warning
7 Always seek assistance before lifting a system cabinet into the 19-inch cabinet - nev-
er do it on your own.
5. Secure the system cabinet to the frame of the 19-inch cabinet by means of the two support
brackets (A, in Figure 4-9) and the screws provided. Make sure the minimum play specified
for the system cabinets is provided (see Chapter 5, “AP 3700 configuration rules and ex-
amples with 19" cabinets”).
6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 to install additional expansion cabinets.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 4-11
montbuch04.fm

Special Installation Notes For internal distribution only

Shielding Connection on the Opening of the LTU Frame

4.4 Shielding Connection on the Opening of the LTU Frame

Caution
7 The shield of all front cables (except network cables and optical fiber cables) must
be secured to the frame with two cable ties at the shelf opening.
Figure 4-10 shows the fastening of the cable shield with two cable ties.

Fig. 4-10 Securing the cable shield

System cables with pre-stripped sections must be used for LTU frames.
>

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
4-12 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch05.fm
For internal distribution only Installation Variants
Standard Cabinet Installation

5 Installation Variants
This chapter provides diagrams for the various HIPath 4000 system installations. Diagrams for
the IPDA are located in the associated chapter. Unless otherwise noted, all diagrams apply to
both U.S. and I.M. installations.

5.1 Standard Cabinet Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.2 Multiple Cabinet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.3 AC-to-DC Power Box Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.4 DC-to-DC Power Box Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.5 Free-Standing Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.5.1 CSPCI Box in UCS Shelf, Stack 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.5.2 CSPCI Box in External 19" Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.5.3 HiPath 4000 Free-Standing Installation (Maximum Configuration). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.6 Cabling Diagram, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.7 Shelf Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.7.1 CSPCI Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.7.1.1 Duplex Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.7.1.2 Simplex Mono Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.7.2 UPR Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.7.3 Unit Peripheral Nonredundant Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.7.4 AP 3700-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.7.5 AP 3700-13 (Expansion Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.7.6 Redundant Power Box Stacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.8 Installation with AP 3700 cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.8.1 Connecting AP 3700-9 to L80XF/LTUW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.8.2 Connecting AP 3700-13 to CSPCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.8.3 AP 3700 configuration rules and examples with 19" cabinets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.9 MDFHX 6 Mounting Location, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.10 MDFHX 8 Mounting Location, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

5.1 Standard Cabinet Installation

This section describes the different ways to install the cabinets depending on the individual re-
quirements of each customer.

Each cabinet, including the front cover, forms a shielded unit. Cabinets should be
> locked while the system is running and the cover should be replaced following test-
ing and maintenance.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 5-1
montbuch05.fm

Installation Variants For internal distribution only

Standard Cabinet Installation

5.1.1 Single-Cabinet Installation

The dimensions shown in these illustrations are minimum dimensions in millimeters

> (mm).

Figure 5-1 shows a diagram of a single cabinet installation.

90 mm

SIEMENS
HiPath 4000

125 mm
110 mm

460 mm
550 mm
720 mm 150 mm 350 mm
773 mm 515 mm

Figure 5-1 Single-Cabinet Installation

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
5-2 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch05.fm
For internal distribution only Installation Variants
Multiple Cabinet Installation

5.2 Multiple Cabinet Installation

The dimensions shown in the following illustration are minimum dimensions in milli-
> meters (mm).

Figure 5-2 shows a diagram of a multiple cabinet installation.

500
25 1840
SIEMENS
HiPath 4000

425 150 350

1415

400

1015

400

615
65

525 335

15 125
25 90
65

515
Max. 4 cabinets per stack
650

Figure 5-2 Multiple Cabinet Installation

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 5-3
montbuch05.fm

Installation Variants For internal distribution only

AC-to-DC Power Box Installation

5.3 AC-to-DC Power Box Installation

The AC power box is called a unit alternating current distribution (UACD) power sup-
> ply.
The dimensions shown in the following illustration are minimum dimensions in milli-
meters (mm).
Figure 5-3 shows the dimensions of the UACD.
1310

610

700

90

550
720
650
Figure 5-3 UACD

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
5-4 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch05.fm
For internal distribution only Installation Variants
DC-to-DC Power Box Installation

5.4 DC-to-DC Power Box Installation

The DC power box is called a unit direct current distribution (UDCD) power supply.
> The dimensions shown in the following illustration are minimum dimensions in milli-
meters (mm).
Figure 5-4 shows the dimensions of a 2-stack UDCD.
1535
Z Z Z
Y Y Y I
O
D T T T C UDCD(b)
P R R R B
O O O P 610
N N N

Z
925
Z Z
O Y Y Y I
D T T T C
R R R
P
O O O
B
P
UDCD(a)
N N N

315
BUA 225 Base Unit
90
Front View 550
720 650

Figure 5-4 UDCD

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 5-5
montbuch05.fm

Installation Variants For internal distribution only

Free-Standing Installation

5.5 Free-Standing Installation

The CSPCI box, including the front cover, forms a shielded unit. Free slots must be
> covered.

5.5.1 CSPCI Box in UCS Shelf, Stack 1

In this example, the common control cabinet is installed in the UCS shelf of the first stack.

#) Cable channel Stack4

Rec. size 110 x 60mm
UP/UPR 15
-> Reference point (L80XF/LTUW)
= Basic configuration
Stack1
UP/UPR
UP/UPR 3 (L80XF/LTUW)
450 (L80XF/LTUW)

UP/UPR
MDF- MDF- UP/UPR (L80XF/LTUW)
HX6 HX6 (L80XF/LTUW)
(n) (1)
UP/UPR 12
or or 1305 (L80XF/LTUW)
UP/UPR 1
MDF- MDF- (L80XF/LTUW)
HX8 HX8
(n) 745 (1) UCS
(CSPCI) CSPCI box
(BP-CS-CPCI)
#)
#) #)

Figure 5-5 CSPCI Box in UCS Shelf, Stack 1

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
5-6 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch05.fm
For internal distribution only Installation Variants
Free-Standing Installation

5.5.2 CSPCI Box in External 19" Cabinet

In this example, the common control cabinet is installed in a 19" external cabinet.

#) Cable channel HE = Height unit in 19" SR

Rec. size 110 x 60mm 19"

-> Reference point 450

Stack4
= Basic configuration Stack1

UP/UPR 15
UP/UPR 4 (L80XF/LTUW)
CSPCI box

4HE
450 (L80XF/LTUW)
(BP-CS-CPCI)
UP/UPR
MDF- MDF- UP/UPR (L80XF/LTUW)
HX6 HX6 (L80XF/LTUW)
(n) (1)
or or 1305 UP/UPR 13
UP/UPR (L80XF/LTUW)
MDF- MDF- (L80XF/LTUW)
HX8 HX8
(n) 745 (1)
UP/UPR 1
(L80XF/LTUW)
#)
#) #)

Figure 5-6 CSPCI Box in External 19" Cabinet

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 5-7
montbuch05.fm

Installation Variants For internal distribution only

Free-Standing Installation

5.5.3 HiPath 4000 Free-Standing Installation (Maximum Configuration)

Figure 5-7 shows a diagram of a free-standing installation (viewed from above). This diagram
applies to the U.S. with the exception of the MDF cabinets.
The maximum AC-powered system configuration consists of four 4-stack cabinets and one 2-
stack UACD.
The maximum DC-powered system configuration consists of four 4-stack cabinets and two 2-
stack UACDs.

2700
MDFHX6 175 MDFHX6
1000
Cable duct = Basic configuration
Ref.point
= Reference for
max. 2 Stack 1 Stack 2 Stack 3 Stack 4
SRR 01 800 system cable
UACD 4 U... 4 UP... 4 UP.... 4 UP...
SRR = Row of cabinets
SR 105 101 102 103 104 SR = Cabinet
1000
773 Expansion

Front
Location of:
800
ST, printer, server, etc.

1500 ~3870 250

Figure 5-7 HiPath 4000 Free-Standing Installation

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
5-8 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch05.fm
For internal distribution only Installation Variants
Cabling Diagram, I.M.

5.6 Cabling Diagram, I.M.

16
-
9
8
-
1

UP
16 UPR
- 16
9 -
9
-8
1 -8
1
UP
UP
UPR
16 UPR
- 16
9 -
9
8
- 8
1 -
1
UP
UP
UPR
16 UPR
- 16
9 -
9
8
-
1 -8
1
MDFHX6 UP
UP
(1) UPR
UPR

MDFHX6
(6) UCS Stack
(CSPCI) 2, 3, 4

Stack
1

Figure 5-8 HiPath 4000 Cable Routing

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 5-9
montbuch05.fm

Installation Variants For internal distribution only

Shelf Configuration

5.7 Shelf Configuration

This section shows board and power supply locations on the common control and expansion
shelves.

5.7.1 CSPCI Box

5.7.1.1 Duplex Cabinet

SL Modules
OT
6 SF2X8
5 DSCXL (CC-B)
4
3 Fan HDCF/HDCF • Fan
2 • DSCXL (CC-A) •
1 DSCXL (ADP) •
PSU (1) • PSU (2)
redundant

• -> Basic shelf configuration extended with:

2 x DSCXL:S30810-Q2311-X300 SF2X8:S30810-Q2309-X
RTM: S30810-Q2312-X (back)

Figure 5-9 CSPCI, duplex configuration

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
5-10 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch05.fm
For internal distribution only Installation Variants
Shelf Configuration

5.7.1.2 Simplex Mono Cabinet

SL Modules
OT
6
5
4
3 Fan HDMO/HDCF • Fan
2 • •
1 DSCXL (ADP) •
PSU (1) • PSU (2)
redundant

• -> Modules belong to basic shelf configuration:

PSU: ACPCI/DCPCI Fan: C39165-A7050-B13
DSCXL: S30810-Q2311-X RTM: S30810-Q2312-X (back)
HDCF: S30810-Q2319-X300 MCM: S30810-Q2313-X (back)
HDMO: S30810-Q2310-X

Figure 5-10 CSPCI, simplex configuration (mono)

5.7.2 UPR Cabinet

The unit peripheral redundant (UPR) cabinet is otherwise known as the LTUW cab-
> inet.

LTUW

#
Peripheral Peripheral
PSUP

LTUCA

modules
PSUP

modules

Figure 5-11 UPR Cabinet

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 5-11
montbuch05.fm

Installation Variants For internal distribution only

Shelf Configuration

5.7.3 Unit Peripheral Nonredundant Cabinet

The unit peripheral non-redundant (UP) cabinet is otherwise known as the L80XF
> cabinet.

L80XF

Peripheral Peripheral
LPC80

LTUCA

PSUP
modules modules

Figure 5-12 UP Cabinet

5.7.4 AP 3700-9
Part number: S30805-G5412-X

Component placement (front side)

● Slot 1-5: Peripheral boards
● Slot 6: Common control unit NCUI2 (AP3700-9)
● Slot 7-10: Peripheral boards
● Max. 3 LUNA 2 power supplies

Only two power supplies are needed. The third LUNA2 is used for a redundant pow-
> er supply.

● CompactPCI cassette (Survivability Server), only used in AP 3700-9 (HiPath 4000)

This Compact PCI cassette can be installed in the shelves as an optional emergency
> server (Survivability Server).

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
5-12 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch05.fm
For internal distribution only Installation Variants
Shelf Configuration

Slots
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

(AP Emergency) - optional

CompactPCI cassette
Max. 3x LUNA 2
(Power Supplies)

Figure 5-13 AP 3700-9 front view

Component placement (back side) with patch panels

● Slot 10-7: Patch panels (8-, 20- and 24-port RJ45 connectors/CHAMP connectors)
● Slot 6: Board for power connection (DC above/AC below)
● Slot 5-1: Patch panels (8-, 20- and 24-port RJ45 connectors/CHAMP connectors)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 5-13
montbuch05.fm

Installation Variants For internal distribution only

Shelf Configuration

Figure 5-13 shows the Survivability Server slide-in shelf.

Fan tray

Power supply mod-

ule

DSCXL board

HDMO or HDCF board

Fan tray

Survivability Server slide-in shelf

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
5-14 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch05.fm
For internal distribution only Installation Variants
Shelf Configuration

Slots
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Figure 5-14 AP 3700-9 (Back View) with Patch Panels

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 5-15
montbuch05.fm

Installation Variants For internal distribution only

Shelf Configuration

5.7.5 AP 3700-13 (Expansion Box)

Part number: S30805-G5413-X

Component placement (front side)

● Slot 1-6: Peripheral boards
● Slot 7: Central control board LTUCA (AP3700-13)/with (H3800BB) not occupied
● Slot 8-14: Peripheral boards
● max. 4 LUNA 2 power supplies

Only three power supplies are needed. The fourth LUNA2 is used for a redundant
> power supply.

Slots
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

max. 4x LUNA 2
(Power Supplies)

Figure 5-15 AP 3700-13 front view

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
5-16 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch05.fm
For internal distribution only Installation Variants
Shelf Configuration

Component placement (back side) with patch panels

● Slot 14-8: Patch panels (8-, 20- and 24-port RJ45 connectors/CHAMP connectors)
● Slot 7: Board for power connection (DC above/AC below)
● Slot 6-1: Patch panels (8-, 20- and 24-port RJ45 connectors/CHAMP connectors)
● Ground connector

Slots
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Figure 5-16 AP 3700-13 (back view) with patch panels

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 5-17
montbuch05.fm

Installation Variants For internal distribution only

Installation with AP 3700 cabinets

5.7.6 Redundant Power Box Stacks

UACD 2

PDPX2 LPC 1 LPC 2 LPC 3 ACDPX

Stack 3/4

UACD 1

PDPX2 LPC 1 LPC 2 LPC 3 ACDPX

Stack 1/2

Figure 5-17 Redundant Power Box Stacks

5.8 Installation with AP 3700 cabinets

Depending on the system configuration, the following connections are possible when adding
AP3700 cabinets to a HiPath 4000 system.

5.8.1 Connecting AP 3700-9 to L80XF/LTUW

In this example, an AP 3700 basic cabinet with 9 peripheral boards is connected to a HiPath
4000 V4.0 system.
Using an NCUI4 board, the AP 3700 basic cabinet is connected to an STMI4 board on an
L80XF or LTUW shelf in a HiPath 4000 V4.0 system (see Figure 5-18).

5.8.2 Connecting AP 3700-13 to CSPCI

In this example, an AP 3700 expansion cabinet with 13 peripheral boards is connected to a Hi-
Path 4000 V4.0 system. This expansion can only be done with a 19" cabinet.
The connection is via a cable from the RTM board on the CSPCI shelf to the LTUCA board in
the expansion cabinet (see Figure 5-18).

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
5-18 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch05.fm
For internal distribution only Installation Variants
Installation with AP 3700 cabinets

AP 3700-9 (9 slots) in
19" cabinet or
standalone

HiPath 4000 V4.0 AP 3700-9 *-G5412-X

N CSAPE
C x
S U
T C
UP/UPR 3 I P
(L80XF M 4 C
/LTUW) I I
4
LUNA LUNA LUNA
2 2 2
UP/UPR 2
(L80XF/LTUW)

UP/UPR 1
(L80XF/LTUW) AP 3700-13 (13 slots) only in
19" cabinet
UCS
CSPCI
RTM AP 3700-13 *-G5413-
L
T
U
C
A

LUNA LUNA LUNA LUNA

2 2 2 2

Figure 5-18 AP 3700 connections

5.8.3 AP 3700 configuration rules and examples with 19" cabinets

The rules apply to the installation of the CSPCI, AP 3700 IP, AP 3700 components and DCDR
in standard commercial 19" cabinets.

5.8.3.1 Suitable cabinet models

The standard commercial 19" cabinets used for server and network applications in the IT sector
are suitable for installing the HiPath 4000 components.
The elements installed in the cabinet must be accessible from the back and front.
Cabinets that allow 19-inch components to be installed from the back and front should be used
(>= 4 vertical struts).
In accordance with the relevant vendor’s selected rack program, the following parts and devic-
es must/can be obtained from the rack vendor:

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 5-19
montbuch05.fm

Installation Variants For internal distribution only

Installation with AP 3700 cabinets

● Fixing screws/material for installing devices/cabinets;

● Sliding rails/support rails;
● Wire feeding elements and cable management;
● Multiple socket busbars/outlets;
● Distribution cabinets/elements and patch panels for LAN connections;
● Fan unit(s) incl. connecting cables;
● Other accessories, for example, additional angles, shelves (ensure air permeability), C-
rails, etc.
In line with the planned configuration, cabinets with the appropriate number of rack units (Us,
1 U = 44.45 mm) should be selected.
A typical cabinet width of 700 mm ...800 mm and height of at least 600 mm is recommended.
Greater cabinet depths (800 mm ...900 mm) make installation easier and cable management
more convenient and also allow more components to be installed at the back of the cabinet.
The space between the cabinet rows should typically be the same as the width of the cabinet.
If AP 3700 IP and AP 3700 boards are to be installed, the cabinet must have sliding rails/sup-
porting rails with a minimum load-bearing capacity of 40 kg.
The sliding rails can be obtained from the rack manufacturer.
The 19" installation brackets supplied should be used to fix the components to the cabinet
struts.
To ensure sufficient heat removal, the cabinets should be arranged in accordance with the sam-
ple configurations (sections 2.2.1...4).
CSPCI requires 4 HEs and should preferably be placed in the bottom of the rack. Enough space
should be allowed for ventilation (air drawn in from the left, air escapes on the right).
The AP 3700-* requires 11 HEs (10 HEs + free space).
Two AP 3700-* boards can be installed without mandatory ventilation (without a fan unit).
If there are more than two AP 3700-* boards, a 19" fan unit (1 U) must be used.
Ventilation should be provided across the whole area.
The required air flow rate of at least 600 m3/h should be ensured.
If necessary, it is possible to install a second fan unit (if redundancy is desired but not manda-
tory).
A minimum clearance of 2 HEs should be allowed between the CSCPI and the AP 3700-* board
The cabinets should be chosen and configured so that there is sufficient air circulation.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
5-20 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch05.fm
For internal distribution only Installation Variants
Installation with AP 3700 cabinets

EMC requirements:
> As the individual cabinets already satisfy EMC requirements, the use of shielded
racks is not necessary.
19" connector strips in the appropriate country-specific version should be provided for connec-
tion to the AC power supply (230V or 115 V).
Power requirement for CSPCI: 4A/115V 2A/230V
Power requirement for AP 3700 IP: 6A/115V, 3A/230V
Power requirement for AP 3700: 8A/115V, 4A/230V
Power requirement for survivability unit: 4A/115V, 2A/230V
Power requirement for fan unit: see manufacturer’s information
In the case of DC systems (48V), you must ensure that a fused 16 A connection is used.
Grounding must be performed in a star shape from the external earth bar to the rack (min.
cross-section 102). All ground wires in the rack should be routed to the to the central ground
connection point in the relevant cabinet. The cabinets should be connected to each other using
ground wires. DC power lines must be shielded for EMC reasons.
The shielding should be removed on both sides.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 5-21
montbuch05.fm

Installation Variants For internal distribution only

Installation with AP 3700 cabinets

5.8.3.2 Sample configuration AP 3700 or AP3700 IP in a cabinet with 25 rack units

25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
DCDR DCDR
12
11
10
09
08
07 AP 3700 (1)
AP 3700 (1)
06
05
04
03
02
01

must remain free (1)... Expansion sequence

may be used
Figure 5-19 Installing AP 3700/AP 3700 IP in a cabinet with 25 rack units

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
5-22 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch05.fm
For internal distribution only Installation Variants
Installation with AP 3700 cabinets

5.8.3.3 Sample configuration CSPCI with AP 3700 in a cabinet with 37 rack units

37
36
35
34
33 AP 3700
HiPath (5) (3)
3700
32
AP 3700 (2) HiPath 3700 (2)
31
30
29
28
27
26 Lüfter / Fans
25
24
23
DCDR
22
AP 3700 (4)
21
20
19
18
17
AP 3700 (1) 16
15
14
13 DCDR
12
11
10
09
08
07
06 AP 3700 (3)
05
04
03
CSPCI
02
01

must remain free

(1)... Expansion sequence
may be used

Figure 5-20 Installing CSPCI with AP 3700 in a cabinet with 37 rack units

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 5-23
montbuch05.fm

Installation Variants For internal distribution only

Installation with AP 3700 cabinets

5.8.3.4 Sample configuration CSPCI with AP 3700 in a cabinet with 42 rack units

41
40
39
AP 3700
HiPath (3)(3)
3700 38 AP 3700
HiPath (6)(3)
3700
37
36
35
34
33
32
Lüfter / Fans 31 Lüfter / Fans
30
29
28
27
AP 3700 (2) 26 AP 3700 (5)
25
24
23
22
21
20
DCDR 19 DCDR
18
17
16
15
14
13
AP 3700 (1) 12 AP 3700 (4)
11
10
09
08
07
Lüfter / Fans redundant 06 Lüfter / Fans redundant
05
04
03
CSPCI
02
01

must remain free

(1)... Expansion sequence
may be used

Figure 5-21 Installing CSPCI with AP 3700 in a cabinet with 42 rack units

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
5-24 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch05.fm
For internal distribution only Installation Variants
Installation with AP 3700 cabinets

5.8.3.5 Sample configuration CSPCI with AP 3700 in a cabinet with 47 rack units

Cabinet 1 Cabinet 2 ... 4

47
46
45
44
43 AP 3700 (7)
AP 3700 (3)
42
41
40
39
38
37 Lüfter / Fans
Lüfter / Fans 36
35
34
33
32
31 AP 3700 (6)
AP 3700 (2) 30
29
28
27
26
25 DCDR
24
DCDR 23
22
21
20
19
18 AP 3700 (5)
17
AP 3700 (1)
16
15
14
13
12
11
Lüfter / Fans redundant 10 must remain free
09
08 may be used
07
06
05
AP 3700 (4) (1)... max. (15) expansion se-
04 quence
03
CSPCI
02
01

Figure 5-22 Installing CSPCI with AP 3700 in a cabinet with 47 rack units

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 5-25
montbuch05.fm

Installation Variants For internal distribution only

MDFHX 6 Mounting Location, I.M.

5.9 MDFHX 6 Mounting Location, I.M.

33 +1
Ap- Drill template supplied
prox

MDFHX 6 MDFHX 6

1100 1) 1305 2)

420 1)

450 2)
20 4) 1) Mounting dimensions
2) Clipping dimensions
3) Distance between MDF HX units
4) Minimum distance from floor

Figure 5-23 Mounting the MDFHX 6 Wall Fixture

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
5-26 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch05.fm
For internal distribution only Installation Variants
MDFHX 8 Mounting Location, I.M.

5.10 MDFHX 8 Mounting Location, I.M.

33 +1
Ap-
Drill template supplied
prox

MDFHX 8 MDFHX 8

530 1) 745 2)

420 1)

450 2)
20 4) 1) Mounting dimensions
2) Clipping dimensions
3) Distance between MDFHX units
4) Minimum distance from floor

Figure 5-24 Mounting the MDFHX 8 Wall Fixture

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 5-27
montbuch05.fm

Installation Variants For internal distribution only

MDFHX 8 Mounting Location, I.M.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
5-28 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch06.fm
For internal distribution only Grounding the HiPath 4000
Grounding the MDF, I.M.

6 Grounding the HiPath 4000

This section describes instructions for grounding the main distribution frame (MDF) and the
system.

6.1 Grounding the MDF, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.2 Connecting and Grounding the Cabinets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.1 Grounding the Base Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.2.2 Installing the Ground Straps Between Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3 Grounding the System, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.4 Grounding the System, U.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.5 Grounding AP 3700 System Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.6 System Ground Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

6.1 Grounding the MDF, I.M.

Caution
7 In undefined main distribution frames (external distributors), you must connect the
ground of the base cabinet (CSPCI) and the main distribution frame directly to the
ground busbar. In this instance, you must not connect a ground connection directly
from the main distribution frame to the base cabinet.
To ground the MDF:
1. Connect the ground connector (green/yellow) from the ground busbar (building ground) to
terminal connection (1) of the first main distribution frame (see Figure 6-1).

Ground connect. pt.1 in MDF

Ground con-
ductor MDF to
base cabinet
2
1
Ground conductor from
ground busbar to MDF

Figure 6-1 HiPath 4000 ground connection

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 6-1
montbuch06.fm

Grounding the HiPath 4000 For internal distribution only

Connecting and Grounding the Cabinets

2. If several main distribution frames are installed, connect a second ground conductor to the
terminal connection (2) of the first main distribution frame (see Figure 6-1) and connect this
line to terminal connection point 2 of the second main distribution frame.
Repeat this procedure, if necessary, from main distribution frame 2 to 3 and 4.

6.2 Connecting and Grounding the Cabinets

Figure 6-2 shows the placement of the connecting plate assemblies (straps) for grounding pur-
poses.
Ground straps
Back Box straps

Stack 4 Stack 3 Stack 2 Stack 1

Power box

CSPCI

Ground straps
for base cabinets

Figure 6-2 HiPath 4000 Grounding Straps

For the CSPCI box, no extra FPE line (green/yellow) is needed. Grounding occurs
> via the 230 Vac or the 0 Vdc.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
6-2 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch06.fm
For internal distribution only Grounding the HiPath 4000
Connecting and Grounding the Cabinets

6.2.1 Grounding the Base Cabinets

To ground the base cabinets:
1. Position the individual stacks and the power box according to the site to avoid repositioning
them later.
2. Using the supplied ground straps (1), determine the correct distance between the roller
bases by inserting the straps in adjacent bases (see Figure 6-3 on page 6-3).
3. Attach the various ground straps to the left (2) and right (3) of the roller base using the
screws that are provided.

1 2 3
Figure 6-3 Installing the Ground Strap at the Base of the Cabinets

6.2.2 Installing the Ground Straps Between Cabinets

Danger
7 Never operate the system without the specified straps. The strapping serves as an
internal grounding conductor connection for the individual components.
To install the ground straps between cabinets:
1. Removing the four screws shown in (1) of Figure 6-4 on page 6-4.
2. Insert the supplied ground straps (2) and tighten the screws.
3. Depending on the system configuration, attach additional ground straps between the two
stacks and the power (3) and (4).

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 6-3
montbuch06.fm

Grounding the HiPath 4000 For internal distribution only

Connecting and Grounding the Cabinets

1 2

3 4

Figure 6-4 Installing the Ground Straps Between the Cabinets

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
6-4 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch06.fm
For internal distribution only Grounding the HiPath 4000
Grounding the System, I.M.

6.3 Grounding the System, I.M.

To ground the system, connect a second ground conductor to the terminal connection (1) of
the main distribution frame (see Figure 6-1 on page 6-1) and connect this to the ground con-
nection in the roller base (see Figure 6-5 on page 6-5).

Figure 6-5 HiPath 4000 ground connection

An internal ground conductor between the base cabinet and the expansion cabinets is supplied
ex-works. See Figure 6-7 on page 6-7.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 6-5
montbuch06.fm

Grounding the HiPath 4000 For internal distribution only

Grounding the System, U.S.

6.4 Grounding the System, U.S.

To ground the system in the U.S.:
1. Attach one end of the ground wire to the back of the cabinet as shown in Figure 6-6.

Figure 6-6 Grounding the HiPath 4000

2. Attach the other end of the ground wire to the back of the common control shelf.
3. Attach the remaining grounding wires to the expansion cabinets (see Figure 6-7 on page
6-7).
4. Secure the wires with screws.
Further information about power supply and grounding for HiPath 4000 systems operated in
the U.S. can be found in the following manual: HiPath 4000 V4.0 Customer Site Planning and
Power Grounding Manual.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
6-6 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch06.fm
For internal distribution only Grounding the HiPath 4000
Grounding the System, U.S.

Figure 6-7 HiPath 4000 internal ground connection

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 6-7
montbuch06.fm

Grounding the HiPath 4000 For internal distribution only

Grounding AP 3700 System Cabinets

6.5 Grounding AP 3700 System Cabinets

To ground the AP 3700 cabinets, see the following alternatives, which depend on the installa-
tion (standalone unit or expansion cabinet; see Figure 6-8 for grounding connectors):
● Connect the ground conductor directly from the ground busbar to the grounding connector.
Or:
● Extend an existing internal ground conductor from a HiPath 4000 system and attach it to
the grounding connector on the AP 3700.

AP 3700-9 AP 3700-13

Grounding connectors

Figure 6-8 AP 3700-9/AP 3700-13 grounding connectors

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
6-8 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch06.fm
For internal distribution only Grounding the HiPath 4000
System Ground Connections

6.6 System Ground Connections

Network type TN-S (neutral conductor 0V, protective ground connector PE; functional and protec-
tive ground FPE).

sub-distribution
L1,2,3 N PE
L1,2,3
N
PE

Distribution

L1,2,3 N PE
Plant

MDF
System

FPE*) FPE*)

additional
ground busbar

FPE*)
H EB

Main/ground busbar

S =service panel *) FPE cross sections in accordance

EB=equipotential bonding with national regulations
conductor e.g. (VDE 0800 part 2)
Net type: TN-S
power VDE. 0100 part 540 Warning: FPE cables without green/yellow
company VDE 0800 part 2 insulation must be furnished with
green/yellow identifier labels
(H59999-J6) at each end.

Figure 6-9 HiPath 4000 grounding overview

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 6-9
montbuch06.fm

Grounding the HiPath 4000 For internal distribution only

System Ground Connections

Figure 6-10 on page 6-10 and Figure 6-11 on page 6-11 shows a diagram of the system ground
connections.

with MDFHX6 max. 2xUACD Stack 1

2304 ports CAB600XW
~ ~

MDF MDF
HX6 HX6
6) 1) 3) 2)

1)
Battery
FPE cable 352 +
C39195-A7488-B800 -
gnye

Ground busbar 1) Ground strap C39165-A7080-C146

2) Ground strap C39165-A7080-C22
3) PE cable connected

With non-defined MDF

2xUACD Stack 1
MDF
~ ~

3) 2)

FPE cable 352 1)

gnye Battery
+
-
Ground busbar 1) Ground strap C39165-A7080-C146
2) Ground strap C39165-A7080-C22
3) PE cable connected

Figure 6-10 Schematic representation of HiPath 4000 system ground connections

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
6-10 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch06.fm
For internal distribution only Grounding the HiPath 4000
System Ground Connections

Figure 6-11 shows a diagram of the system ground connection for HiPath 4000 in 19-inch mod-
els.
for 19-inch cabinets 1) FPE cross-section min. 10 mm2, AWG 6
with MDFHX6/8 2) PE line is connected
(max. 2304 ports possible)

MDF MDF 2 x UACD Rack 1 Rack n

HX6 MDF HX6
6) 1) ~ ~

2)

1) FPE cable
gnye
Battery
-
+
Ground busbar

If a 19-inch UACD is used, then the ground wire (PE) is connected to the power supply
terminal in addition to the building ground connection.

Figure 6-11 Schematic representation of the HiPath 4000 system ground connections (19-
inch cabinets)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 6-11
montbuch06.fm

Grounding the HiPath 4000 For internal distribution only

System Ground Connections

Figure 6-12 shows how the ground conductor is connected to the 0-V busbar in the 19” cabinet

Figure 6-12 Earth connection of a ground busbar to the 0-V busbar in a 19-inch cabinet

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
6-12 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply

7 Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply

7.1 Connecting to the Mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.1.1 Connecting to the Mains with LUNA/LPC80 Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.1.2 Connecting to the Mains Using the Power Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.2 Installing a Three-Phase Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.3 Installing a Single-Phase Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.4 Overview of Network Connection 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.5 Installing a Three-Phase or Single-Phase Connection with Mid-Point Grounding, I.M.7-12
7.6 Overview of Network Connection 2, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7.7 Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.8 AC Connection to Power Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.8.1 Routing the Power Cables on an AC-Powered, Nonredundant HiPath 4000 . . . . . . 7-14
7.8.2 Attaching the Power Cable to the CSPCI Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7.9 Setting the Operating Mode for the LPC80, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.9.1 Setting the Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7.10 DC Connection with the External Power Supply, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.10.1 Routing the Power Cables on an AC-Powered, Redundant HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . 7-20
7.10.2 Routing the Power Cables from the UACD and UDCD to the HiPath 4000. . . . . . 7-22
7.10.3 Attaching a DC Cable to the CSPCI Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
7.11 DC Connection with UP/L80XF Cabinet (I.M. Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
7.12 AC-to-DC Connection with a Redundant LTUW Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
7.13 DC Connection with Redundant UPR/LTUW Box (I.M. Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7.13.1 Connecting the Battery to the Power Box, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7.13.2 Connecting the MDF for a Non-Redundant, System, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
7.14 AC-to-DC Connection with AP 3700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
7.14.1 AC Connection AP 3700-9/AP 3700-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
7.14.2 DC Power Supply AP 3700-9/AP 3700-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7.14.3 AC connection AP 3700 in 19" cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7.14.4 DC connection AP 3700 with DCDR (fuse unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
7.14.5 DC connection AP 3700 with DCDR (DC kit for 19-inch cabinet) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
7.15 19-Inch UACD Model (PSR930/PSR930E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
7.15.1 Part Numbers for the UACD Power Box (PSR930/PSR930E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
7.15.2 AC/DC Connection with UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) in 19-Inch Cabinet with AP3700
7-47
7.16 UACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
7.16.1 UACD Equipment Part Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
7.16.2 UACD 1 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
7.16.3 UACD 2 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
7.17 Battery Manager Cabinet for L80XF Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
7.17.1 Part Numbers for Battery Manager Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
7.17.2 Battery Manager, Connection Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
7.18 UDCD, North America Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
7.18.1 UDCD Equipment Part Numbers, North America Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-1
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only

7.18.2 Overview of UDCD Stack 1 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63

7.19 Connecting the Power Box to the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
7.20 PSDXE Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
7.21 Calculating the Battery Cabling, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-2 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Connecting to the Mains

7.1 Connecting to the Mains

Mains is a term used in Europe to describe a normal commercial outlet. Mains is go-
> ing to be used throughout this document to describe the AC outlet.

The HiPath 4000 must be connected to a TN-S network for installation purposes. An
> independent electric circuit must be used to protect both cabinets in the event of
mains failure.
TN-S is a type of grounding classification. Each letter indicates as follows:
T—All exposed conductive metalwork connected directly to ground.
N—All exposed conductive metalwork connected directly to the grounded supply
conductor
S—Separate and neutral ground conductors.

Danger
7 The grounding wire of the in-house power connector must always be connected to
the mains power socket first.
HiPath 4000 has been designed to accept four different types of power supply worldwide as
follows:

Caution
7 The HiPath 2k/3k/4k PSU is sufficiently protected against lightning (up to 2kV) on the
230V connection. For areas at particular risk, it is recommended that additional light-
ning protection be provided before the connection line. The lightning ground bar with
the part number C39334-Z7052-C31 offers increased protection up to 4kV.

The use of a lightning ground bar is mandatory in Brazil.

● Three-phase mains (~230 V/400 V)
● Single-phase mains for max. 2 power supply units
● Single-phase mains with midpoint grounding (~110 V/220 V) or (~120 V/240 V)
● Three-phase mains (~120 V/208 V) or (~127 V/220 V)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-3
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
Connecting to the Mains

There are two connection variants to the mains:

● Connecting to the mains directly by means of a power supply unit (nonredundant power
supply) in the individual shelves (LUNA/LPC80)

To connect the HiPath 4000, modem and TAP (technician workstation) to the mains, a mul-
tiple-plug connector must be supplied by the customer. This multiple-plug connector must
be installed so that the system power cable supplied is sufficient (length = 3 m (10 ft).

Warning
7 The mains plug must be easily and safely accessible in all installation variants. Un-
plug the mains plug immediately in the event of danger!
● Connecting to the mains by means of a power box (redundant power supply)

Danger
7 Before operation and before connecting subscribers, ensure that the system is prop-
erly connected to the protective grounding wire.
Never operate the system without the mandatory grounding wire!

You can choose which variant is applicable to your installation.

>

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-4 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Connecting to the Mains

7.1.1 Connecting to the Mains with LUNA/LPC80 Power Supply Units

In the non-redundant power supply variant, the mains connection is made directly to the various
power supply units by means of a connector strip (the connector strips are located in the base
of each stack). Depending on the local power supply (in-house connection), you must observe
the connection criteria in Figure 7-1 on page 7-5.

In Canada and U.S., only L1, L2, and PE are brought to the wall socket. The neutral
> lead for 208 Vac power is not brought to the wall socket.

This part of the illustration applies to

Canada and U.S.
L1
Single-phase network L2 3-phase network
A L3
with midpoint grounding B N ~ 120 V/208 V
~ 110 V/220 V N (PE) PE ~ 127 V/220 V
~ 120 V/240 V
Fuse Fuse
16 A 16 A

L1
L2 3-phase network
L3 ~ 230 V/400 V
N
PE

Fuse
16 A

This part of the illustration PE N L1

applies to Europe and I.M. (L3) International
GNYE BU BK1 character code
gnye bu bk for colors

Cable 3x1.52

1 multiple socket outlet

with up to 5 sockets

LPC80/LUNA
Figure 7-1 Mains connection LPC80/LUNA

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-5
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
Connecting to the Mains

The power cables should already be installed in new systems. Should the AC-to-DC shelf pow-
er supply cables become unplugged during transit, route the power cable in a HiPath 4000 as
follows:
1. Ensure that the system is off.
2. Plug the power cable into the AC-to-DC shelf power supplies (LPC80).
3. Route the power cable through the metal knock-out (see Figure 7-2 on page 7-6) and to
the back of the system.
4. Secure the power cable with a tie-wrap on the metal knock-out.

WARNING
7 Two cable ties are required for proper EMI grounding.
5. Route and plug the other end of the power cable to the mains socket (AC outlet) in the base
unit (BAU) under the shelf (see Figure 7-3 on page 7-7).
6. Repeat this procedure to the L80XF (expansion) cabinets if you have a multi-cabinet instal-
lation.

Figure 7-2 Routing the Power Cable

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-6 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Connecting to the Mains

Figure 7-3 Connecting HiPath 4000 to the Mains, I.M.

Figure 7-3 shows an illustration for the I.M. Canada and U.S. use a different outlet
> strip.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-7
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
Connecting to the Mains

7.1.2 Connecting to the Mains Using the Power Box

In North America, connection is made to the mains using a power cable with a plug.
> This power cable is connected to the mains socket at the factory. The mains socket
is mounted in the UACD and the strain-relieved connection cable is fed out of the
power box.
In the case of the redundant power supply variant, the connection is made to the mains using
a power connector socket on the power box. Depending on the local power supply, you may
need to make a distinction between the different connection variants.
To connect to the mains by means of the power box:
1. Remove the shielded power line with connection box from the power box (Powershelf 1 or
Powershelf 2) and remove the cover of the mains socket.
2. Plug the power cord to the mains socket.

The shielded power lines of the powershelves no longer need to be attached to the
> frame using a grounding bracket.

Stack 1 Stack 2 Stack 3 Stack 4

UPR.. 3 UPR.. 7 UPR.. 11 UPR.. 15

Power box UPR.. 2 UPR.. 6 UPR.. 10 UPR.. 14

UACD 2 UPR.. 1 UPR.. 5 UPR.. 9 UPR.. 13

UACD 1 UCS UPR.. 4 UPR.. 8 UPR.. 12

Powershelf 1 Powershelf 2
Figure 7-4 Connecting to the Mains Using the Power Box

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-8 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Installing a Three-Phase Connection

7.2 Installing a Three-Phase Connection

Danger
7 Before you connect the three-phase power cable (~230 V/400 V), ensure that the
protective ground terminal (building ground) is connected to the system frame.
To install a three-phase connection:
1. Remove the cover to the junction box.
2. Unscrew the coupling on the junction box.
3. Insert the open end of the power cable through the junction box.
4. Strip the wires on the power cable, insert, and secure the wires to the terminals as follows:
(see Figure 7-5 and Figure 7-6 on page 7-10):
a) Attach the green/yellow wire to the (GNYE) terminal.
b) Attach the blue wire to the (BU) terminal.
c) Attach the brown wire to the (BN) terminal.
d) Attach each of the two black wires that emerge from the mains cable to a separate (BK)
terminal on the distribution socket.
e) Depending on the system configuration, repeat the same procedure sequence for the
second power socket.
5. Tighten the screw on the junction box and replace the cover.
The colored wires are as follows.
Green/yellow = grounding wire PE (GNYE)
Blue = neutral N (BU)
Brown = phase 1 L1 (BN)
Black = phase 2 L2 (BK)
Black = phase 3 L3 (BK)

Figure 7-5 UACD Junction Box

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-9
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
Installing a Single-Phase Connection

In-house network socket

Power box bk BK(L3)

bk BK(L2)

bn BN(L1)

bu BU(N)

gnye GNYE(PE)

Figure 7-6 Wiring the UACD Junction Box

7.3 Installing a Single-Phase Connection

With this type of connection, you need to make a few wiring changes in the junction box and
UACD power supply frame before you can make the connection to the in-house network.

Danger
7 Before you connect the single-phase power, ensure that the protective ground termi-
nal (building ground) is connected to the system frame.
To install a single-phase connection to a maximum UACD configuration:
1. Remove the cover to the junction box.
2. Unscrew the coupling on the junction box.
3. Insert the open end of the power cable through the junction box.
4. Strip the wires on the power cable, insert, and secure the wires to the terminals as follows:
a) In the junction box, bridge the BN(L1) port with BK1(L2).
b) Connect the power switches 1, 2 and 3 to the ACDPX in the power supply frame of the
UACD, as shown in the Figure 7-7 on page 7-11.
5. Replace the cover of the junction box.
6. Route the power cable to the mains.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-10 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Overview of Network Connection 1

7.4 Overview of Network Connection 1

3-phase network ~ 230V/400V Single-phase network ~ 230 V

for max. of 2 power supplies
L1
L2
L3 L1
N N
PE PE
Fuse
16 A

Cable 5x2.52 Cable 3x2.52

*)
PE cable must
be connected
PE N L1 L2 L3 PE N L1 L3
L2
GNYE BU BK2 GNYE BU BK2
gnye bu BN BK1 bk2 gnye bu BN BK1 bk2
Cable with International
bn bk1 color cable bn bk1
mains socket
C39195-A7970-B19 codes

ACDPX
PSU
1 /2 /3 CB
1
11 21
UACD
2
11 21
3
11 21
L1 2 3 N PE
*) Insert additional jumper

Figure 7-7 Three-Phase/Single-Phase Connection for Two Power Supply Units

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-11
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
Installing a Three-Phase or Single-Phase Connection with Mid-Point Grounding, I.M.

7.5 Installing a Three-Phase or Single-Phase Connection with Mid-

Point Grounding, I.M.
With this type of connection, you need to make a few wiring changes in the junction box and
also in the power supply frame before you can make the connection to the in-house network.

Danger
7 Before you connect the power phases, make sure that the protective ground terminal
(building ground) is connected to the system frame.
To install a three-phase or single-phase connection with mid-point grounding:
1. Remove the cover to the junction box.
2. Unscrew the coupling on the junction box.
3. Insert the open end of the power cable through the junction box.
4. Strip the wires on the power cable, insert, and secure the wires to the terminals as follows:
a) Insert and secure the blue (BU) and brown (BN) wires together in the junction box.
b) Insert and secure both black (BK) lines together.
c) Connect the power switches 1, 2 and 3 to the ACDPX in the power supply frame UACD,
as shown in the Figure 7-8 on page 7-13.
5. Replace the cover of the junction box.
6. Route the power cable to the mains.

Danger
7 Only one HiPath 4000 DC system with a 25A fuse may be connected per stack to
the UACD.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-12 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Overview of Network Connection 2, I.M.

7.6 Overview of Network Connection 2, I.M.

L1 Single-phase A
3-phase network network
L2 B
~ 120 V/208 V L3 midpoint grounding
~ 127 V/220 V N(PE)
N ~ 110/220 V
PE ~ 120/240 V

Fuse
25 A

Cable 3x42

PE cable must
be connected

*) Reconnect
N L3 N
(PE) L1 (PE) A
(n) B

GNYE BU BK2 GNYE BU BK2

Cable with gnye bu BN BK1 bk2 gnye bu BN BK1 bk2
mains socket bn bk1 bn bk1
C39195-A7970-B19 International
cable color
codes

ACDPX
PSU
1 /2 /3 CB
1
11 21
UACD
2
11 21
3
11 21
L1 N
PE

*) For information on reconnecting, see also diagram:

a) mains socket: V32905-A2-X399
b) ACDP/ACDPX: V32905-A2-X206!

Figure 7-8 Three-Phase/Single-Phase Connection with Midpoint Grounding

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-13
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
Power Supply

7.7 Power Supply

In HiPath 4000, each cabinet features integrated AC-to-DC power supply units (LPC80). An ex-
ternal power box is connected to the HiPath 4000 to support power distribution to the cabinets.

Restrictions
> A power box connection is supported for battery management in HiPath 4000 and
later. For North America (NA) this connection is not supported.

Caution
7 The contact area of all power supply cables must be bonded with two cable fasteners
each (see Figure 7-52 on page 7-65).
The DC power supply usually has a voltage of –48 V. However, some modules require –60 V.
A power supply module (APPS) is used in this case. This -60-V power supply is only provided
for individual shelves.

Caution
7 Never plug in or unplug the APPS module when the power is on.

7.8 AC Connection to Power Supplies

In systems with nonredundant power supply, the CSPCI shelf contains an ACPCI power supply
unit (2 ACPCIs in duplex mode) and each expansion box (L80XF) contains an LPC80 power
supply unit. Each of these power supply units is separately fed with ~230V. This power supply
unit has an input voltage range of ~176 V to ~253 V (45 Hz - 66 Hz) without supplementary
settings. A –48V output voltage is generated and this in turn is transformed into several lower
voltages by a second power supply unit. (PSUP).

7.8.1 Routing the Power Cables on an AC-Powered, Nonredundant

HiPath 4000
Proceed as follows to route the power cables in an AC-powered, nonredundant HiPath 4000
(see also Figure 7-11 on page 7-16 and Figure 7-12 on page 7-17):
1. Ensure that the system is off.
2. If your system features redundant CPUs: Connect the power cables to the
ac-to-ac power supply unit (LPC80).
3. Route the power cables (1) downwards through the frame’s metal knock-out (2) (see Figure
7-9) to the base unit assembly (BUA) under the CSPCI shelf.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-14 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
AC Connection to Power Supplies

4. Secure the power cables with tie-wraps on the metal knock-outs (3).
5. Plug the other end of the power cables to the ac outlet in the BUA.
6. Follow steps 2 through 9 on page 7-21 in Section 7.10.1, “Routing the Power Cables on an
AC-Powered, Redundant HiPath 4000”.

1
2

Figure 7-9 HiPath 4000 AC Installation

7.8.2 Attaching the Power Cable to the CSPCI Box

If the power cable has not already been attached at the factory, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the fixing screws (1) from the MCM board on the back of the CSPCI box and re-
move the board (see also Figure 7-10).
2. Insert the power cable in the socket (2) on the CSPCI box and secure it to the cord grip (3)
with a cable tie.
3. Route the power cable through the cable duct (4) on the MCM board and screw the MCM
board back onto the CSPCI shelf.

2
1 3

4
Figure 7-10 Attaching the power cable to the CSPCI box

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-15
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
AC Connection to Power Supplies

Figure 7-11 on page 7-16 shows a diagram of the AC connection with an L80XF cabinet.

Stack 1 Stack 4
UP UP
LPC L80XF LPC L80XF
80 BAT PS 80 BAT PS
# = S30805-H5284- UP UP
* = S30805-H5298- talk talk
bulk bulk
$ = C39195-A .... UP
UP ~
~ LPC LPC L80XF
80 BAT PS FPE 80 BAT PS
UP $ -A7650-B35 UP
talk talk
bulk bulk
UP UP
~ LPC L80XF ~ LPC L80XF
PS 80 BAT PS
80 BAT
UP UP
talk talk
bulk bulk
CSPCI box UCS
UP
~ UP
~ LPC L80XF
CSPCI box 80 BAT PS
1) UP
MCM equipotential talk
bulk
bonding
#-X12 FPE/PE #-X12 FPE
230/115 V ~
AC AC
~
2) 3) -48 V 3) -48 V
MDF MDF

FPE

MDF-
HX6/8

No. Sachnummer Bemerkung/remark

Bez./design
No. code no. von/from --> nach/to
1) C39195-A7985-B1 AC connection CSPCI, MCM, AC --> MCM, Mate-N-Lok, DC
2) C39195-Z7001-C17 Power cable for "I.M." CSPCI, MCM, AC --> power or UPS
C39195-Z7000-C92 " for "NA"
3) C39334-Z7052-C22 Power strip for "I.M." Stack 1...4
S30807-H6586-X NAPSK for "NA"

Figure 7-11 AC connection with UP/L80XF cabinet (nonredundant)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-16 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
AC Connection to Power Supplies

Stack 1 Stack 4
*-X11 *-X11
UP UP
LPC L80XF LPC L80XF
PS PS
80 BAT UP 80 BAT UP
# = S30805-H5284- talk talk
bulk bulk
* = S30805-H5298- UP UP
~ ~
$ = C39195-A .... LPC L80XF PS FPE LPC L80XF PS
80 BAT UP $ -A7650-B35 80 BAT UP
talk talk
bulk bulk
UP UP
~ ~ LPC L80XF
LPC L80XF PS
80 BAT 80 BAT PS
UP UP
talk talk
bulk bulk
CSPCI box UCS UP
~
LPC L80XF
~ *-X14 80 BAT PS
1) CSPCI box UP
MCM talk
bulk
equipotent
#-X12 FPE/PE #-X12 FPE
+/- 48
~
AC AC

5) -48 V 5)
-48 V
FPE MDF MDF

3)
2)
4)
MDF-
HX6/8 UACD

L 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 L A
C
P Bulk Talk Talk Bulk P D
C PDPX2(1) PDPX2(2) C P AC
X
BAMX1 BAMX2 EBCCB(2) to battery
EBCCB(1)

No. Sachnummer Bemerkung/remark

No. code no. Bez./design
von/from --> nach/to
1) S30805-H5298-X14 DC connection Stack 1, UCS
C39195-A7944-B38 DC cable Stack 1, UCS --> CSPCI box, MCM, Mate-N-Lok
2) C39195-A7944-B16 Cable UACD, DC connection --> Stack 1-2
3) C39195-A7944-B17 Cable UACD, DC connection --> Stack 3-4
4) C39195-Z7904-A25 ALIN CSPCI box, MCM, ALIN --> UACD, BAMX1
5) C39334-Z7052-C22 Power strip for "I.M." Stack 1...4
S30807-H6586-X NAPSK for "NA"
Figure 7-12 AC connection with UP/L80XF cabinet + battery backup (nonredundant)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-17
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
Setting the Operating Mode for the LPC80, I.M.

7.9 Setting the Operating Mode for the LPC80, I.M.

Two power supply units (PSU) from two different manufacturers can be used for LPC80. A
switch located at the back of the PSU allows you to set the operating mode of the PSU to Power
Supply or Battery Charger, depending on the particular application. The operating modes are:

ON = Battery charger
OFF = Power supply

The battery charger feature is not used in Canada or U.S.

>
Figure 7-13 shows the switch of the two different power supply units. Set the operating mode
of the power supply unit using this switch.

Figure 7-13 LPC80 Settings

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-18 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Setting the Operating Mode for the LPC80, I.M.

7.9.1 Setting the Operating Mode

Table 7-1 lists the operating modes of the LPC80.

Between standard/charger for -K7162- Artesyn: neutral switch, clearly identifiable from
mode (on the back of the sticker
LPC80) 1st option: Battery Charger
2nd option: Power Supply Peripheral Shelf:
standard mode forCAB80DSC
for -K7163- Celestica: jumper W1, clearly identifiable from
sticker
ON --> connector W1 with J5 --> battery
charger mode
OFF --> connector W1 with J6 --> standard
mode for CAB80DSC
for K7554- Supplier: MagneTek 3-pin connector behind a
window on the underside of the power supply
unit. (2 screws)
1. Connector in "Mode1": as used with
peripheral shelves
2. Connector in "Mode2": as used with battery
chargers
Between two possible voltag- for -K7162- Artesyn: jumper setting, clearly identifiable
es (in charger mode) from sticker
1st option: 54.7 V (factory setting)
2nd option: 53.5 V
for -K7163- Celestica: jumper J9, clearly identifiable from
sticker
1st option: connection between pin 3 and pin 4
from J9 --> 54.7V (factory setting)
2nd option: connection between pin 1 and pin
2 from J9 --> 53.5V
for K7554- Supplier: MagneTek Switch on the underside
of the power supply unit; (voltages shown on
circuit board)
- Switch in left position --> 53.5V
- Switch in right position --> 54.7V
Table 7-1 Operating Mode Settings of the LPC80

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-19
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
DC Connection with the External Power Supply, I.M.

7.10 DC Connection with the External Power Supply, I.M.

In Canada and U.S., the UPS provides AC power only. It is not a source of DC power.
>
An external system power supply (uninterruptible power supply [UPS] in the U.S.) is a PSU in
which a jumper is connected to the system instead of the LPC80 power supply unit (see Figure
7-18). The jumper feeds the –48 V external power supply to the system. The external –48V is
connected from the DC power box to the individual backplanes of the system cabinets.
The connection of an external battery is identical to the connection of an external power supply
unit.

7.10.1 Routing the Power Cables on an AC-Powered, Redundant HiPath

4000
The bulk and talk circuit breaker cables connect to the UACD or UDCD at one end. At the Hi-
Path 4000, you need to connect the bulk and talk circuit breaker cables as follows (see
Figure 7-20 on page 7-27):
1. Ensure that the system is off.
2. At the back of the CSPCI frame: Connect the BULK circuit breaker cable to the DC con-
nector on the CSPCI box (see Figure 7-15 on page 7-22) and then create a daisy-chain
connection to the X12 connectors on the expansion cabinets.

Ensure that the cables are locked down, otherwise, the LTU shelf that is connect-
7 ed to is not going to function properly.

The top blue connector bulk cable on top of the CSPCI box connects to the bot-
> tom blue connector of the LTUW cabinet. The top blue connector bulk cable on
the LTUW cabinet connects to the bottom blue connector of the LTUW cabinet
immediately above it and so on.
3. At every cabinet: Connect and tie-wrap the shielded portion of the -48-Vdc bulk input
power cable to the cabinet frame.
4. At every cabinet: Connect the -48-Vdc bulk input power cable to the shielded ground at the
left side of each cabinet.
5. For systems with redundant power supply: Route the other two –48 Vdc bulk cables over
to the left side of the CSPCI frame and tie-wrap the shielded portion of the cable to the
shielded ground.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-20 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
DC Connection with the External Power Supply, I.M.

6. Connect the -48-Vdc input talk circuit breaker cables to the X11 connector of the LTUW
shelf.
7. Daisy-chain the -48-Vdc input talk circuit breaker cables to the upper LTUW shelves.
8. At every cabinet: Connect the -48-Vdc talk input power cable to the shielded ground at the
left side of each cabinet.
9. At the back of the CSPCI frame: Route the bottom blue connector -48-Vdc bulk cable (in-
put) to the -48-Vdc connector at the back of the output distribution panel of the UACD or
UDCD.
In the UACD, this cable is called the ALUM cable, and it plugs to the TBD connector.
In the UDCD, this cable is called the power fail cable, and it plugs to the DCPFX1-E3 con-
nector.

Output to
LTUW
shelf

Input from Tie-wraps

UACD or
UDCD

Shielded
ground

Figure 7-14 Connecting the Bulk Power

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-21
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
DC Connection with the External Power Supply, I.M.

7.10.2 Routing the Power Cables from the UACD and UDCD to the
HiPath 4000

Caution
1 Ensure that the power is off.
All internal cabling for the UACD and UDCD should be complete when the equipment goes out
of the factory. The output power cables on the UACD and UDCD are also already connected
on the power shelves.
In the UACD or UDCD, the output power cable must be connected to the CSPCI connector (bot-
tom blue connector of the bulk circuit breaker, see Figure 7-14 on page 7-21).

7.10.3 Attaching a DC Cable to the CSPCI Box

If the DC cable has not already been attached at the factory, proceed as follows:
1. Connect the -48V cable from the external battery to the DC terminal (1) on the base cabinet
(see Figure 7-15).
2. Route the -48V from the -48V fuse module to the CSPCI backplane (2).

Expansion cabinet

-48 V

Base cabinet

(2) CSPCI box

(backplane)

1
-48 V

Figure 7-15 Connecting the external –48V to the DC terminal on the base cabinet

3. Remove the fixing screws (3) from the MCM board on the back of the CSPCI box and re-
move the board (see also Figure 7-17).

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-22 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
DC Connection with the External Power Supply, I.M.

The factory setting for the CSPCI shelf’s power supply coding is always set to ACP-
> CI. To use DC power supplies (DCPCI), you must change the coding according to
the following figure.

Front
"Duplex" configuration

Mod: SF2X8

Mod: DSCXL
F F
A A
N HDMO/HDCF N

Mod: DSCXL

Mod: DSCXL

PSU.. (1) PSU.. (2)

1) 1)

1) Coding of power supplies:

- AC system 1)

Chamber F: empty
Chamber E: empty
Chamber D: Position 1
- DC system 1)

Chamber F: empty
Chamber E: empty
Chamber D: Position 3

Figure 7-16 Coding for power supply configurations ACPCI/DCPCI

4. Insert the DC cable in the socket (4) on the CSPCI box and secure the cable shield to the
cord grip (5) with a cable tie.
5. Route the DC cable out through the cable duct (6) on the MCM board and screw the MCM
board back onto the CSPCI shelf.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-23
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
DC Connection with the External Power Supply, I.M.

4
3 5

6
Figure 7-17 Attaching a DC cable to the CSPCI box

6. Once the -48V cable is connected, check that the correct jumper is plugged into the des-
ignated plug connector for the LPC80 (see Figure 7-18).

Figure 7-18 HiPath 4000 jumper

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-24 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
DC Connection with UP/L80XF Cabinet (I.M. Version)

7.11 DC Connection with UP/L80XF Cabinet (I.M. Version)

Stack 1 Stack 4
*-X11 *-X11
UP UP
L80XF L80XF
# = S30805-H5284- PS PS
BAT UP BAT UP
* = S30805-H5298- talk talk
bulk bulk
$ = C39195-A ....
with UP UP
Jumper L80XF FPE L80XF PS
PS
BAT UP $ -A7650-B35 BAT UP
talk talk
bulk bulk
UP
UP UP
L80XF with L80XF PS
PS
BAT UP Jumper BAT UP
talk talk
bulk bulk
CSPCI box UCS UP

*-X14 L80XF PS
1) BAT
CSPCI box UP
MCM talk
bulk
equipotenti
FPE/PE FPE/PE
+/- 48
#-X12 #-X12
2) 2)

-48 V -48 V
MDF MDF
DC DC
connection connection
-48 V -48 V
FPE

MDFHX6/8

No. Sachnummer Bemerkung/remark

No. code no. Bez./design
von/from --> nach/to
1) S30805-H5298-X DC connection Stack 1, UCS
C39195-A7944-B38 DC cable UCS --> CSPCI box, MCM, Mate-N-Lok
2) C39195-A7944-B33 Cable UCS DC connection --> -48V connection

Figure 7-19 DC connection with UP/L80XF cabinet, nonredundant (I.M. Version)

In Canada and U.S., a DC input configuration is not available.

>
P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-25
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
AC-to-DC Connection with a Redundant LTUW Cabinet

7.12 AC-to-DC Connection with a Redundant LTUW Cabinet

In systems with redundant power supply, there are two PSUP power supplies per LTUW. A –48
V output is provided to each power supply from a separate power box using the backplane, that
is, the ~230 Vac is directly connected to the power box and not to the system.
An AC-powered HiPath 4000 supports one stack of two UACD cabinets.
An external battery connection can also be used to support the power supply.

In North America, an external battery is not supported.

>

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-26 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
AC-to-DC Connection with a Redundant LTUW Cabinet

Stack 1 Stack 4
*-X12 *-X11 *-X12 *-X11
UPR UPR
PS LTUW PS PS LTUW PS
UP UP UP UP
talk talk
# = S30805-H5284- bulk bulk
* = S30805-H5298-
UPR UPR
$ = C39195-A .... LTUW PS LTUW PS
PS FPE PS
UP $ -A7650-B35 UP
UP talk UP talk
bulk bulk
UPR UPR
PS LTUW PS PS LTUW PS
UP UP UP UP
talk talk *-X15
bulk bulk
CSPCI box UCS UPR
*-X14 LTUW PS
*-X15 PS UP
1) UP talk
CSPCI box bulk
MCM

FPE/PE FPE/PE
+/- 48

-48 V 3) -48 V
MDF -48 V MDF

FPE
UACD (2)
-48 V 1 2 1 2 L L A
Bulk Talk P P C
D
PDPX2 C C P AC
X
MDFHX6/8 2)
BAMX2 EBCCB to battery
UACD (1)
4) A
1 2 1 2 L L C
Bulk Talk P P D
PDPX2 C C P AC
X
BAMX1 EBCCB to battery

No. Sachnummer Bemerkung/remark

No. code no. Bez./design
von/from --> nach/to
1) S30805-H5298-X14 DC connection Stack 1, UCS
C39195-A7944-B38 DC cable Stack 1, UCS --> CSPCI box, MCM, Mate-N-Lok
2) C39195-A7944-B16 Cable UACD, DC connection --> Stack 1-2
3) C39195-A7944-B17 Cable UACD, DC connection --> Stack 3-4
4) C39195-Z7904-A25 ALIN CSPCI box, MCM, ALIN --> UACD, BAMX1

Figure 7-20 AC-to-DC connection with redundant UPR/LTUW shelves + UACD (I.M. ver-
sion)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-27
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
DC Connection with Redundant UPR/LTUW Box (I.M. Version)

7.13 DC Connection with Redundant UPR/LTUW Box (I.M. Version)

Stack 1 Stack 4
*-X12 *-X11 *-X12 *-X11
UPR UPR
LTUW PS PS LTUW PS
PS UP
# = S30805-H5284- UP talk UP talk UP
bulk bulk
* = S30805-H5298-
$ = C39195-A .... UPR UPR
LTUW PS LTUW PS
PS FPE PS UP
UP UP UP
talk $ -A7650-B35 talk
bulk bulk

UPR UPR
LTUW PS PS LTUW PS
PS UP UP
1) UP talk UP talk
bulk *-X15
bulk
CSPCI box UPR
UCS
*-X14 *-X15 LTUW PS
PS UP
CSPCI box UP talk
MCM bulk
2)
FPE/PE FPE/PE
+/- 48

-48 V 2) -48 V
DC
connection MDF MDF
DC
FPE connection

MDFHX6/8

No. Sachnummer Bemerkung/remark

No. code no. Bez./design
von/from --> nach/to
1) S30805-H5298-X14 DC connection Stack 1, UCS
C39195-A7944-B38 DC cable Stack 1, UCS --> CSPCI box,MCM, Mate-N-Lok
2) C39195-A7944-B33 Cable UCS, DC connection --> -48V connection

Figure 7-21 DC connection with redundant UPR/LTUW shelves (I.M. version)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-28 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
DC Connection with Redundant UPR/LTUW Box (I.M. Version)

7.13.1 Connecting the Battery to the Power Box, I.M.

To connect an external battery to the HiPath 4000:
1. Connect the 0 V supply from the battery to the roller base of the power box (see Figure 7-
22).
The arrows indicate the points
where a 0 V battery connection
is made to the power box.

Figure 7-22 0 V Battery Connection

2. Attach the –48 V supply from the external battery to the cable drawn from the system (see
Figure 7-23).

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-29
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
DC Connection with Redundant UPR/LTUW Box (I.M. Version)

EBCCB 1
PSU
(EBCCB 2)
LPC

ON-
OFF
BAMX1
X6 (X7)
-48 V sense
PDPX2(1)
(PDPX2(2))
POWER
SHARE

Fuse
70 A ON-
OFF

BAMX1
(BAMX 2)
UBATT

Ext. batt.Items in parentheses indicate

double configuration in the Pow-
-48 V er box.
Figure 7-23 External Battery Connection to Power Box (Back View)

7.13.2 Connecting the MDF for a Non-Redundant, System, I.M.

In Canada and U.S., the UPS provides AC power only. It is not a source of DC power.
>
The power supply for the main distribution frame is branched from extension boxes 1 and 2 and
connected to the main distribution frame by means of fuse modules (Si1/Si2), each with 1.6 A
fuses (see Figure 7-24 on page 7-31 and Figure 7-25 on page 7-31). The –48 V connectors
from the MDFs can be combined as required. Ensure that the number of MDFs connected at a
fuse does not exceed the overall power requirement for each 1.6 A fuse.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-30 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
DC Connection with Redundant UPR/LTUW Box (I.M. Version)

MDFHX6 MDFHX6
1/2/3
Backplane L80XF
4/5/6

-48 V -48 V
Exp. 1 Exp. 2
-48 V -48 V

Si1 Si2 2.0 A each

Figure 7-24 Example of a –48 V Connection for Main Distribution Frame (Non-Redundant)

The arrows indicate the -48 V cables

and fuse module (Si1, Si2). The cable
from Si1 is connected to MDF 1/2/3.
The cable from Si2 is connected to
MDF 4/5/6.
Fuses:
L80XF = 2,0 A
LTUW (X15) = 1.6 A

Figure 7-25 -48 V Fuse Module for MDF (Non-Redundant)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-31
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
AC-to-DC Connection with AP 3700

The arrows indicate the connec-

tion for -48 V on the main distri-
bution frame. The -48 V cables
from the various fuses must be
connected here.
If necessary, this connection
can also be connected to other
main distribution frames (up to a
maximum power consumption
of 1.6 A per fuse).

Figure 7-26 -48 V Main Distribution Frame Connection

7.14 AC-to-DC Connection with AP 3700

7.14.1 AC Connection AP 3700-9/AP 3700-13

Figure 7-27 shows the power inputs for the AP 3700-9 and AP 3700-13.
AP 3700-9 AC connections AP 3700-13

Figure 7-27 AC connections AP 3700-9/AP 3700-13

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-32 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
AC-to-DC Connection with AP 3700

7.14.2 DC Power Supply AP 3700-9/AP 3700-13

Figure 7-28 shows the DC inputs for the AP 3700-9 and AP 3700-13.
AP 3700-9 DC power supplies AP 3700-13

Figure 7-28 DC power supplies AP 3700-9/AP 3700-13

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-33
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
AC-to-DC Connection with AP 3700

7.14.3 AC connection AP 3700 in 19" cabinet

19" rack 2...4 Racks from behind 19" rack 1

AP3700 AP3700

LU LU LU LU LU LU LU LU
NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 2) 2) NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2

FAN module FAN module

6)
AP3700 AP3700

6)

LU LU LU LU LU LU LU LU
NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2
2)
2)

AP3700 AP3700 6)

6)

LU LU LU LU LU LU LU LU
NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2
2)
2)
FAN module FAN module

AP3700
6)

6) *) CSPCI

LU LU LU LU RTM
NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 MCM
2)

6) *) *)
2)
(F)PE
AC AC

1) 1)
*) Set up a secure star-shaped earth connection from the earth bar to the cabinet. Secure cable with
cable ties.

Figure 7-29 AC connection AP 3700 in 19" cabinet

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-34 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
AC-to-DC Connection with AP 3700

7.14.4 DC connection AP 3700 with DCDR (fuse unit)

19" rack 2...4 19" rack 1
Racks from behind

AP3700 AP3700

LU LU LU LU LU LU LU LU
NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2
7)
FAN module FAN module

AP3700 6) AP3700

6)

LU LU LU LU LU LU LU LU
NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2
8) 7) 8)
(-) DCDR (-) (-) DCDR (-)

AP3700 AP3700
6)

6)

LU LU LU LU LU LU LU LU
NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2
7)
FAN module FAN module

AP3700
6)

7)
8) CSPCI

LU LU LU LU 6) RTM
NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2
MCM

8)
6)
10) *) *) (F)PE
(F)PE
DC + / - 48V DC + / - 48V
Connection
*) Set up a secure star-shaped earth connection with or without L bridges
from the earth bar to the cabinet. Secure cable
with cable ties. L2+L1+L2- L1- PE L2+L1+L2- L1- 10)
PE
4a) 4)or5) 4a) 4)or5)
Figure 7-30 DC connection AP 3700 with DCDR (fuse unit)
P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-35
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
AC-to-DC Connection with AP 3700

Table 7-2 lists the cables to be used when the AP 3700 is to have AC/DC wiring in the 19" cab-
inet (see the numbers in Figure 7-29 and Figure 7-30).

No Part number Name From To Re-

. mark

1) from the rack vendor AC multiple sock- 19-inch rack, AC multiple Housing installation
et socket outlet
outlet
2) C39195-Z7001-C17 Power cable CSPCI / AC multiple socket outlet f. IM
or AP3700 230 V
C39195-Z7001-C19 f. NA

3) S30805-H5298-X10 DC connection 19" rack, CSPCI / Interim

with cable 2x Si 1+2 AP3700 sol-
2x C39195-A7944-B57 ution
4) C39195-A7944-B16/17 Cable UACD (1), (2) Rack 1 ... 4,
-48 V, Bulk/Talk -> DC connection -X10 or
-48 V, Bulk/Talk -> terminal block (see no.10)
4a) C39195-A7556-B540 Cable 0 V UACD earth bar Terminal block, see no.10
5) C39195-A7954-B33 Cable DC -48-V feed Rack 1 ... 4 Interim
DC connection. -X10 solution
6) C39195-A7650-B250 Cable 10 mm2 AP 3700 - grounding Central ground point in (F)PE
connector the rack
7) C39195-A7944-B56 Cable +/- 48 V 19" rack, DCDR CSPCI / Series
Si F01/F02/F32 and F31 AP3700
8) from the DCDR vendor Cable 19" rack, DCDR Terminal block includ-
S30122-X8019-X4 2 x +/-48 V in 19" rack, ed
9) C39195-A7488-B800 Cable Rack, central ground External earth bar
point
10) S30122-X8018-X2 Terminal block Installed in 19" rack includ-
ed

Table 7-2 Cables for AP3700 AC/DC connection in the 19" cabinet

7.14.5 DC connection AP 3700 with DCDR (DC kit for 19-inch cabinet)
This chapter once again describes DC connection to the DCDR fuse unit if the delivery includes
a “DC kit” for 19-inch cabinet installation in the AP 3700 cabinets.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-36 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
AC-to-DC Connection with AP 3700

19" rack 2...4 Racks from behind 19" rack 1

AP3700 AP3700

LU LU LU LU LU LU LU LU
NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2
2) 2)
FAN module FAN module

AP3700 3) AP3700

3)

LU LU LU LU LU LU LU LU
NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2
2) 1)
(-) DCDR (-) (-) DCDR (-)

1) AP3700 AP3700
1)
3)

3)

LU LU LU LU LU LU LU LU
NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2
2)
FAN module FAN module

AP3700
3)

2)
1) CSPCI

LU LU LU LU 3) RTM
NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2
MCM

3)
1) (F)PE
1) (F)PE
*) / 6)
DC + / - 48V *) / 6) DC + / - 48V
*) Set up a secure star-shaped earth connection Connection
from the earth bar to the central ground connect Without L jumpers or
with L jumpers
point on the rack (min. cross-section 102)
PE L2+L1+L2-L1-
4) + 5)
Cable from UACD PE L2+L1+L2-L1-
+ " -earth bar
1)
-48 V " - bulk/talk

Figure 7-31 DC connection AP 3700 with DCDR (DC kit for 19-inch cabinet)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-37
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
AC-to-DC Connection with AP 3700

7.14.6 DCDR connection from behind

DCDR from behind

X32 X30 X04 X02

(-) X31 X29 X03 X01 (-)
1)
(+) (+) 1)

2) 1A Si/CB
for MDF 2)
16 A Si/CB 16 A Si/CB
L2- L2+ for 3rd + 4th for 1st + 2nd L1+ L1-
terminal terminal
block block

Figure 7-32 DCDR connection from behind

Table 7-3 lists the cables to be used for DC wiring in the AP 3700 in the 19-inch cabinet (see
numbering in Figure 7-31 and Figure 7-32).

No Part number Name From To Re-

. mark

1) from DCDR Cable 19" rack, DCDR Terminal block in 19-inch

manufact. 2 x +/-48V, 162 rack,
S30122-X8019-X4 S30122-X8018-X2
2) C39195-A7944-B56 Cable 19" rack, DCDR CSPCI /
+/- 48V Si/CB F01/F02/F32 and AP3700
F31
3) Installation Cable AP 3700 - grounding Rack, central ground point (F)PE
material 10 mm2 connector/ central rack PE point
Ground
4) C39195-A7944-B16/17 Cable UACD (1), (2) Rack 1 ... 4,
from -48 V, 102 -48 V, Bulk/Talk -> Terminal block
S30805-G5405-X
5) C39195-A7556-B540 Cable UACD earth bar Rack 1 ... 4,
from 0 V, 102 UACD earth bar Terminal block
S30805-G5405-X
6) C39195-A7488-B800 Cable Rack, central ground External earth bar (F)PE
35 mm2 point ext. earth bar
central rack PE point

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-38 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
AC-to-DC Connection with AP 3700

Table 7-3 Cables for DC connection of AP 3700 in the 19-inch cabinet

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-39
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
AC-to-DC Connection with AP 3700

Figure 7-33 shows the DCDR fuse unit for the 19" installation version

Figure 7-33 DCDR fuse unit for 19" installation

Technical specifications
Dimensions: Width = 435 mm,Depth = 205 mm, Height = 90 mm, Installation height = 2 U
Weight: Complete with fuses approx. 4kg
The power supply connection cables are also supplied (see SK S30122-K7698-X).
Fixing screws for DCDR and the terminal block for rack installation should be obtained from the
rack vendor for the specific rack used.

Caution
7 The breaker panel unit DCDR must always be installed above a CSPCI or AP3700-
9/13.
Operating characteristics of DCDR:
● Operating voltage: 80 Vdc (the HiPath 4000 system always requires 60 Vdc)
● Total current per side: 80 A
● Maximum nominal current for automatic circuit breaker per slot: 25 A

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-40 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
AC-to-DC Connection with AP 3700

The approved 16-A automatic circuit breaker (V39118-Z7180-A6) should al-

>
●

ways be
used to connect the cabinets CSPCI, AP3700-9, and AP 3700-13.
● In the case of LM orders based on the project planning procedures, the 16-A au-
tomatic circuit breakers are automatically planned depending on the configura-
tion.
● For each DCDR, two 1-A automatic circuit breakers (V39118-Z7180-A8) are
provided in advance for the connection of external devices.
● An order with part number is required in all other cases (for example, additional
requirements).
● Cable cross-section: 35 mm2
● Short-circuit current: 3000 A

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-41
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
AC-to-DC Connection with AP 3700

7.14.7 DC connection of AP 3700 to the MDF

To set up a -48-V connection from an AP 3700 cabinet to an MDF, an appropriate fuse panel
must first be installed on the back of the AP 3700 because this does not have a -48-V fuse for
the MDF.
For information on where to install and connect the fuse panel, refer to the diagram:
Fuse panel
SK -> S30805-H5412-X10
with 2 x 1-A automatic circuit breakers
HP 4000 *)

AP3700

-
LU LU LU LU
NA2 NA2 NA2
2)
FAN module

6)

CSPCI
11)
RTM
MCM on connector X210 for SAPP
MDF-HX8/6 BB
-UE (AP3700 IP) or
on connector X212 for SAPP
EB
2) (AP3700)
(F)PE
AC

1)

*) Fuse panel can be installed

in the following locations:
SAPP BB -> X101 - X104
SAPP EB -> X101 - X106

Figure 7-34 DC connection of AP 3700 to the MDF

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-42 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
19-Inch UACD Model (PSR930/PSR930E)

7.15 19-Inch UACD Model (PSR930/PSR930E)

The UACD power box (PSR930/PSR930E) is a new AC/DC power box for use in 19-inch cab-
inets.
The UACD power box consists of the following 19-inch mounting units:
> Base cabinet PSR930 (with base controller board A901)
> Expansion cabinet PSR930E

The UACD power box (PSR930/PSR930E) may only be installed in a separate,

>
●

closed 19" cabinet. This cabinet must ensure mechanical and electrical protec-
tion and may only be serviced by authorized service personnel.
● All PSR930 lines (in the 19" cabinet) must be secured with an appropriate cord
grip (e.g. cable tie).
Figure 7-35 shows a diagram of the UACD base cabinet PSR930.

Base 3 x 1500-W power supply modules

controller

System Circuit-breaker strip

equipped with:
configuration
40 40 40 40 90 90 A

--- System --- Batt. 180 A

or
100 100 90 90
A A

-- System -- Batt.
Figure 7-35 UACD Base Cabinet PSR930 (Front View)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-43
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
19-Inch UACD Model (PSR930/PSR930E)

The UACD expansion cabinet PSR930E has the exact same structure as the base cabinet, mi-
nus the base controller.

Before you put the power box into operation, ensure that all power supply modules
> at the front are firmly attached to the frame to guarantee a secure contact.

If you want to replace a power supply module or change the number of power supply
> modules, you must hold down the “System configuration” button (see Figure 7-35)
on the controller for at least three seconds after the replacement/expansion so that
the alarm system can be reassigned to the power supply module.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-44 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
19-Inch UACD Model (PSR930/PSR930E)

To connect the power supply cables to the UACD, you must first remove the rear cover.
First of all, remove the cover plate
(1) at the rear of the UACD by re-
1 moving the lateral fixing screws (2).

Figure 7-36 Removing the UACD Cover

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-45
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
19-Inch UACD Model (PSR930/PSR930E)

Figure 7-37 shows a diagram of the UACD base and expansion cabinet PSR930/PSR930E.

1
- 2
+ Output terminals
Output terminals +/- 48V to the system
+/- 48V to the battery

Input terminals
~230/380V from the
network
-
+/- 48V connection
+
If a basic and expansion cabinet are used, the +/-48V are connected as shown in this
image.

Figure 7-37 UACD Power Box PSR930/PSR930E (Rear View)

To set up communication with the expansion cabinet, first connect the relevant bus cable (1)
between the base cabinet and the expansion cabinet. Then use the contactor control monitor-
ing cable (2) to connect the base cabinet and the expansion cabinet (see also the Service Man-
ual).

The base and expansion cabinets are physically connected left and right at the rear
> by a metal bracket (indicated in green on the diagram) (see also the Service Manu-
al).

To connect the system’s +/-48 V to the output terminals on the UACD (see Figure 7-
37), you must first remove the blue cable connector at one end of the cable supplied
and then strip the cable. This cable is connected directly to the terminals.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-46 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
19-Inch UACD Model (PSR930/PSR930E)

7.15.1 Part Numbers for the UACD Power Box (PSR930/PSR930E)

Table 7-4 lists the equipment implemented in PSR930/PSR930E and the corresponding part
numbers.

Qty. Name Part number Remark

1 PSR930 (1) EZY:S30050-G6383-X100 Power supply and distribution cabi-
net
3 Rec/Mod GR90 1500 W EZY:S30050-K6383-X Rectifier (power supply module), to be
ordered separately
1 Base Controller EZY:S30050-Q6383-X100 For replacement orders
4 Circuit Breaker 40 A V39118-Z7180-A11 Fuses for the system or
2 Circuit Breaker 100 A V39118-Z7180-A12 Fuses for the system
1 Circuit Breaker 180 A V39118-Z7180-A14 (2x90 A) Fuses for the battery

1 PSR930E (2) EZY:S30050-G6383-E100 Power supply and distribution cabi-

net, expansion
3 Rec/Mod 48 V/1500 W EZY:S30050-K6383-X Rectifier (power supply module), to be
ordered separately
4 Circuit Breaker 40 A V39118-Z7180-A11 Fuses for the system or
2 Circuit Breaker 100 A V39118-Z7180-A12 Fuses for the system
1 Circuit Breaker 180 A V39118-Z7180-A14 (2x90 A) Fuses for the battery

Table 7-4 Devices in PSR930/PSR930E

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-47
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
19-Inch UACD Model (PSR930/PSR930E)

7.15.2 AC/DC Connection with UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) in 19-Inch

Cabinet with AP3700

Rack 1 Rack 2

AP AP 3700

UACD "new" AP AP
# 4)
230/ PSR930
MDF .. 400V -
4 3 21 Output - - - DCDR -
+ DCDR + + +
+ Si 4x40A
~ AP AP
§)

min. 2.52 230/ PSR930E

~400 -
AP
4 3 21 CSPCI
+ MCM
ALIN 2x
~ §) - + - + 16mm²
FPE/PE FPE/PE
2x
21 + 16mm² 43 +
Rack
->3 (2 1)
->4 (4 3)
All lines
3) 3) 10m2

&) Battery
- &) FPE cross-section min. 10mm2 , AWG
+ 6 (AWG = American Wire Gage)
§) PE line is connected

Ground busbar
#) AC terminals

Figure 7-38 AC/DC Connection with UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) in 19-Inch Cabinet with
AP3700
P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-48 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
19-Inch UACD Model (PSR930/PSR930E)

7.15.3 AC/DC Connection with UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) in 19-Inch

Cabinet with UPR/LTUW

Stack 1 Stack 4
*-X12 *-X11 *-X12 *-X11
UPR UPR
PS LTUW PS PS LTUW PS
UP UP UP UP
talk talk
bulk bulk

UACD "new" UPR UPR

4) LTUW PS FPE LTUW PS
# PS PS UP
UP UP $ -A7650-B35 UP
230/ PSR930 talk talk
400V - Output bulk bulk
4 3 21 Si 4x40A
+ UPR UPR
PS LTUW PS PS LTUW PS
~ §) UP UP
UP talk UP talk
bulk bulk
*-X14
min. 2.52 230/ PSR930E -48V *-X15
- UCS MDF UPR
~400 3bulk 4talk *-X15 3bulk 4talk
4 3 21 PS
2) FPE PS LTUW UP
+ CSPCI $-A7558 talk
UP
MCM -B35 bulk
~ §) ALIN
Stack 2
1) 3bulk 4talk FPE/PE
Stack 3
&) 1bulk 2talk
-48V
MDF

2) 5)
3)
4)
* = S30805-H5298-X..
Ground Battery
&) - $ = C39195-A ....
busbar + # = AC terminal block, see
Figure 7-38
MDF .. &) FPE cross-section min. 10mm2 , AWG
6 (AWG = American Wire Gage)
§) PE line is connected

Fig. 7-39 AC/DC connection with UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) in 19” cabinet with UPR/
LTUW

The following table refers to Figure 7-38 and Figure 7-39.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-49
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
19-Inch UACD Model (PSR930/PSR930E)

No. Part number Name Remark (from --> to)

1) S30805-H5298-X14 DC cable Stack 1, UCS, -X14 --> CSPCI, Mate-N-Lok
C39195-A7944-B38 connector
2) C39195-A7944-B16/17 - Cable UACD, PSR930/930E --> stack 1.... 4
3) C39195-A7556-B540 + Cable UACD, PSR930/930E --> stack 1, 0-V busbar
4) Cable length supplied: ALIN - cable UACD, PSR930, base controller --> CSPCI, MCM,
2.5 m ALIN
5) C39165-A7080-D1 0-V busbar Mounted in stack 1 on the roll plate

Table 7-5 Cable table for UACD (PSR930/930E)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-50 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
19-Inch UACD Model (PSR930/PSR930E)

7.15.4 Power Supply Connection Variants for UACD (PSR930/PSR930E)

The following country-specific power supply connection variants are available for UACD
(PSR930/930E):

7.15.4.1 Connection to a Three-Phase Network

With a three-phase network, the 3 neutral wires are connected with a contact jumper (1). Con-
nect the corresponding power line as illustrated below.
Figure 7-40 shows the network connection to the UACD for a three-phase network.
1. First connect the ground wire
N L1-L3 PE (PE).
2. Connect the neutral wire (N) to
1 one of the three terminals provid-
ed for this purpose.
3. Now connect the three phases L1,
L2 and L3.
Overload protection:
3 x 10A per phase (400V AC)

Fig. 7-40 Connecting a mains delta connection (PSR930/PSR930E)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-51
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
19-Inch UACD Model (PSR930/PSR930E)

7.15.4.2 Installing a Single-Phase Connection

The jumper (1) - if still installed - must be removed for a single-phase connection. Connect the
relevant power cable as shown in the following diagram.
Figure 7-41 shows how a UACD in a single-phase connection is connected to the power supply.
3xN 3xL 1. First of all unscrew the jumper (1)
PE connected to the three neutral
conductors.
2. Connect the ground wire (PE):

1 3. Connect the three individual neu-

tral conductors (N).
4. Connect the three individual phas-
es (L).
Fusing:
3 x 10 A per phase (230 Vac)

Figure 7-41 Installing a Single-Phase Connection (PSR930/PSR930E)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-52 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
19-Inch UACD Model (PSR930/PSR930E)

7.15.4.3 Installing a Two-Phase Connection

The jumper (1) - if still installed - must be removed for a two-phase connection. Connect the
relevant power cable as shown in the following diagram.
Figure 7-42 shows how a UACD in a two-phase connection is connected to the power supply.
1. First of all unscrew the jumper (1)
L1-L2-L1-L2-L1-L2 connected to the three neutral
PE conductors.
2. Connect the ground wire (PE):

1 3. Connect the individual phases

(L1/L2).
Fusing:
6 x 10 A per phase (230 Vac or 2 x 115
Vac)

Figure 7-42 Installing a Two-Phase Connection (PSR930/PSR930E)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-53
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
19-Inch UACD Model (PSR930/PSR930E)

7.15.4.4 Installing a Delta Connection

The jumper (1) - if still installed - must be removed for a delta connection. Connect the relevant
power cable as shown in the following diagram.
Figure 7-43 shows how a UACD in a delta connection is connected to the power supply.
1. First of all unscrew the jumper (1)
L1-L3-L2-L3-L2-L1
PE connected to the three neutral
conductors.
2. Connect the ground wire (PE):

1 3. Connect the individual phases

(L1, L2, and L3).
Fusing:
6 x 10 A per phase (230 Vac or 2 x 115
Vac)

Figure 7-43 Installing a Delta Connection (PSR930/PSR930E)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-54 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
19-Inch UACD Model (PSR930/PSR930E)

7.15.5 Battery Connection for UACD (PSR930/PSR930E)

To connect a battery to the UACD, proceed as shown in the following diagram.
Figure 7-44 shows how the battery is connected to the UACD (PSR930/PSR930E).
1. First connect the battery cables to
the battery ports (+/-) on the
UACD.

PSR930 - 2. Now connect the battery cables to

the relevant battery.

PSR930E

Figure 7-44 Battery Connection for UACD (PSR930/PSR930E)

If the UACD temperature sensor is not used or if the distance between the battery
> and the power box is more than 20 m, the sensor must be removed.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-55
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
UACD

7.16 UACD
Figure 7-45 shows the UDCD DC-to-DC power box.

The EBCCB is not used in the U.S.

>
X
M

EBCCB
BA
Stack 1,2,/3.4
PDPX2

ACDPX
LPC

LPC

LPC

Figure 7-45 UACD for a Redundant LTUW Cabinet

7.16.1 UACD Equipment Part Numbers

Table 7-6 lists the equipment and corresponding part numbers of the UACD.

Qty. Name Part number Description

1 UACD (1) S30805-G5405-X Power supply and distribution cabinet for
HiPath 4500
1 ACDPX S30050-K7028-X1 Power supply field
3 LPC, NG-Mod- S30807-H6120-X1/X2 Component parts for main power supply
ule modules with cable types
1 PDPX2 S30807-E6250-X Terminal field
1 BAMX1 S30805-H5401-X11 Battery Manager 1, kit
BAMX1 S30807-K6215-X1 Battery Manager 1
BAEX S30050-Q7048-X Battery control and power failure manage-
ment
Table 7-6 UACD Equipment Part Numbers for a Redundant LTUW Cabinet

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-56 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
UACD

Qty. Name Part number Description

1 EBCCB S30807-K6710-X Battery connection with safety cutout

1 UACD (2) S30805-G5405-X Power supply and distribution cabinet for Hi-
Path 4500
1 ACDPX S30050-K7028-X1 Power supply field
3 LPC, NG-Mod- S30807-H6120-X1/X2 Component parts for main power supply
ule modules with cable types
1 PDPX2 S30807-E6250-X Terminal field
1 BAMX2 S30805-H5401-X12 Battery Manager 2, kit
BAMX2 S30807-K6215-X2 Battery Manager 2
1 EBCCB S30807-K6710-X Battery connection with safety cutout
Table 7-6 UACD Equipment Part Numbers for a Redundant LTUW Cabinet

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-57
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
UACD

7.16.2 UACD 1 Connections

Cable Cable Cable

L N PE L N PE L N PE LPC power supply

CP1 CP2 CP3

14 A 14 A 14 A

ACDPX

LPC(1) LPC(2) LPC(3)

*) LPC, DC output:
1 15 13 1 15 13 1 15 13
+ 2 16 - + 2 16 - + 2 16 - with jumper --> 53.5V
without jumper --> 54.7V
*)

LPC1 LPC2 LPC3

40 A 40 A 1
FCS Bulk
NGA1 40 A 40 A 2
NGA2 to Stack
40 A 40 A 1
1-2
Talk

NGA3
40 A 2
-48 V

70 A
NGA POW.
BATT. PDPX2 SHARE
IN

1)

X2 BAEX X8
+
-

X7 X6 X1 X3 X9
BATT. BAMX1
INPUT
BAEXF

NGAR

NGA1
NGA2
NGA3
NGA
WRA

PFI
- 48 V sense
- 48 V sense

70 A 14 A

CSPCI shelf PDPX2 BAMX2 EBCCB

ALIN cable
UACD 2

UACD 2
X8 -> contactor control output CAB1 Battery
X9 -> contactor control output CAB2
1) -> contactor control input
Figure 7-46 UACD 1 Connections

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-58 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
UACD

7.16.3 UACD 2 Connections

Cable Cable Cable

LPC power supply PE N L PE N L PE N L

CP1 CP2 CP3

14 A 14 A 14 A
ACDPX

LPC(1) LPC(2) LPC(3)

PE
13 15 1 13 15 1 13 15 1
*) LPC, DC output: - 16 2 + - 16 2 + - 16 2 +
with jumper --> 53.5V
without jumper --> 54.7V *)

LPC1 LPC2 LPC3

1 40 A 40 A
Bulk

FCS
to Stack 2 40 A 40 A

3-4 1 40 A 40 A
Talk

40 A
-48 V

70 A
POW.
SHARE NGA
PDPX2 BATT.
IN
NGA3
NGA2
NGA1

+
-
BAMX2 BATT.
INPUT
1)
14 A 70 A

EBCCB
BAMX1
X9 BAEX X3
to BAEX UACD 1
UACD 1
Battery X9 -> contactor control output CAB2
1) -> contactor control input

Figure 7-47 UACD 2 Connections

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-59
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
Battery Manager Cabinet for L80XF Shelf

7.17 Battery Manager Cabinet for L80XF Shelf

Figure 7-48 shows the Battery Manager cabinet for the L80XF shelf.
EBCCB

X2
X1

EBCCB
M
M

BA
BA

Stack 3,4
PDPX2
Stack 1,2
PDPX2

ACDPX
LPC

LPC

Figure 7-48 Battery Manager Cabinet for L80XF Shelf

7.17.1 Part Numbers for Battery Manager Cabinet

Table 7-7 lists the equipment and corresponding part numbers of the Battery Manager cabinet.

Qty. Name Part number Remark

1 UACD S30805-G5405-X Power supply and distribution cabinet
for H4000
1 ACDPX S30050-K7028-X1 Power supply field
2 LPC, NG-Module S30807-H6120-X1/X2 Component parts for main power supply
modules with cable types
1 PDPX2 S30807-E6250-X DC terminal field
1 BAMX1 S30805-H5401-X11 Battery Manager 1, kit
BAMX1 S30807-K6215-X1 Battery Manager 1
BAEX S30050-Q7048-X Battery Control and Power Fail Manage-
ment
1 EBCCB S30807-K6710-X Batt. conn. w. automatic circuit-breakers

1 PDPX2 S30805-H5401-X10 DC terminal field, kit

S30807-E6250-X DC terminal field
Table 7-7 Battery Manager Cabinet Equipment

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-60 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Battery Manager Cabinet for L80XF Shelf

Qty. Name Part number Remark

1 BAMX2 S30805-H5401-X12 Battery Manager 2, kit
BAMX2 S30807-K6215-X Battery Manager 2
1 EBCCB S30807-K6710-X Batt. conn. w. automatic circuit-breakers
1 UACD S30805-G5405-X Power supply and distribution cabinet
for H4000
Table 7-7 Battery Manager Cabinet Equipment

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-61
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
Battery Manager Cabinet for L80XF Shelf

7.17.2 Battery Manager, Connection Configurations

Line Line
L N PE LPC power supply L N PE

CP1 14A CP3 14A

ACDPX

*) LPC, DC output:
LPC(1) LPC(3) with jumper --> 53.5V
1 15 13 1 15 13 without jumper -->
+ 2 16 - + 2 16 - 54.7V
*) *)
FCS
LPC1 LPC2 LPC3 LPC1 LPC2 LPC3

40 A 1 40 A 1

Bulk
NGA1
Bulk

40 A 2 40 A 2 To
LPC1 To
LPC1 Stack
NGA1 40 A 40 A 1 Stack 40 A 1
3-4

Talk
Talk

1-2 40 A
40 A 2 40 A 2
-48 V

-48 V

70 A 70 A
NGA POW. NGA POW.
PDPX2 SHARE PDPX2 SHARE
BATT. BATT.
IN IN
1)
NGA
BAMX1 BAMX2
X2 BAEX X8 -
+

-
+

X7 X6 X1 X3 X9
BATT. BATT.
NGA
BAEXF

INPUT
NGAR

INPUT
- 48 V sense
- 48 V sense

NGA
WRA

PFI

1)

14 A 70 A 14 A 70 A
CCDAX-BGR
ALIN cable
EBCCB EBCCB

X8 -> contactor control output BAMX1

X9 -> contactor control output BAMX2
1) -> contactor control input Battery Battery

Figure 7-49 Battery Manager, Connection Configurations

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-62 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
UDCD, North America Only

7.18 UDCD, North America Only

Figure 7-50 shows the UDCD DC-to-DC power box.

Stack 1,2/3,4

ICBP
Zytron

Zytron

Zytron
ODP

BUA

Figure 7-50 UDCD DC-to-DC Power Box (North America Only)

7.18.1 UDCD Equipment Part Numbers, North America Only

Table 7-8 lists the equipment and corresponding part numbers of the UDCD.

Qty. Name Part number Remark

1 BUA S30805-G5409-X Base Unit (Base unit assembly)

1 UDCD (1) S30805-G5406-A Unit DC Distribution

1 ICBP S30807-E6588-X Input circuit breaker panel
3 Zytron-Module S30122-H5308-X DC-to-DC converter
1 ODP S30807-E6589-X Output distribution panel
DCPFX S30807-Q6220-X DC power fail card

1 UDCD (2) S30805-G5406-X Unit DC Distribution

1 ICBP S30807-E6588-X Input circuit breaker panel
Table 7-8 Equipment for UDCD DC-to-DC Power Box

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-63
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
UDCD, North America Only

Qty. Name Part number Remark

3 Zytron-Module S30122-H5308-X DC-to-DC converter
1 ODP S30807-E6589-X Output distribution panel
DCPFX S30807-Q6220-X DC power fail card
Table 7-8 Equipment for UDCD DC-to-DC Power Box

7.18.2 Overview of UDCD Stack 1 Connections

Figure 7-51 on page 7-64 shows a connection diagram of UDCD stack 1.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-64 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
UDCD, North America Only

(+) COM. –48 Vdc

EMI filter MODE RET
(-) CHOKE
CB Protective
100 ground
- + - +
BUA

J2 J1

CB1 CB2 CB3 ICBP UDCD (1)

30 A 30 A 30 A
J5 J4 J3
J6 J6 J6
Zytron Zytron Zytron
(1) (2) (3)
+- +- +-
J7 J7 J7
J9 J8 J9 J8
J21 J20 J19
-48 V 40 A J18 Talk
40 AJ17 Bulk
to stack(1)
J16 RTN

J7 J6 J5 ODP
E3
DCPFX

J2 J1

CB1 CB2 CB3

30 A 30 A 30 A
ICBP UDCD (2)
J5 J4 J3
J6 J6 J6
Zytron Zytron Zytron
(1) (2) (3)
+- +- +-
J7 J7 J7
J9 J8 J9 J8
J21 J20 J19
-48 V 40 A J18 Talk

40 A J17 Bulk
to stack (2)
J16 RTN

J7 J6 J5
E4 ODP to CSPCI or
DCPFX E3 stack 2
DCPFX E4
Figure 7-51 Overview of UDCD Stack 1 Connections

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-65
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
Connecting the Power Box to the System

7.19 Connecting the Power Box to the System

To connect the power box to the system:
1. Attach the cable from connector X1 in the BAMX1 (BAEX) to the ALIN connector in the
CSPCI box (stack 1).
2. From PDPX2 (1), stack 1/2, and PDPX2 (2), stack 3/4, connect one –3-V TALK and one –
4-V BULK cable to the relevant –48-V connectors on the lower shelves at the back of each
stack. Table 7-9 and Figure 7-52 on page 7-65 show how to connect the bulk and talk ca-
bles from the BAMX to the HiPath 4000 cabinets.

Stack 1 (CABCCD) Stack 2 (LTU..4) Stack 3 (LTU..8) Stack 4 (LTU..12)

TALK PDPX2 (1) to TALK NEW CAB PDPX2 TALK PDPX2 (2) to TALK NEW CAB PDPX2
center -48-V connec- (1) to center -48-V center -48-V connec- (2) to center -48-V
tor connector tor connector
BULK PDPX2 (1) to BULK NEW CAB BULK PDPX2 (2) to TALK NEW CAB PDPX2
right -48-V connector PDPX2 (1) to right - right -48-V connector (2) to right -48-V con-
48-V connector nector
Table 7-9 List of –48 V BAMX to a HiPath 4000 Cabinet Cable Connections, Redundant
Refer also to the “Section 7.20, “PSDXE Connection”, on page 7-67” for additional information.

Back
Stack 4 Stack 3 Stack 2 Stack 1

LTU.. 15 LTU.. 11 LTU.. 7 LTU.. 3

Power box
LTU.. 14 LTU.. 10 LTU.. 6 LTU.. 2

LTU.. 13 LTU.. 9 LTU.. 5 LTU.. 1

LTU.. 12 LTU.. 8 LTU.. 4 CSPCI

TALK BULK TALK BULK TALK BULK TALK BULK

NEW CAB NEW CAB PDPX2(2) PDPX2(2) NEW CAB NEW CAB PDPX2(1) PDPX2(1)
PDPX2(2) PDPX2(2) PDPX2(1) PDPX2(1) -48 V MDF
Figure 7-52 –48-V Connections from PDPX2 to the Shelves, Redundant

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-66 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Connecting the Power Box to the System

7.19.1 Connecting the MDF for a Redundant System, I.M.

The power supply for the main distribution frame is branched from UACD 1 (-48-V connector
unit TALK PDPX2(1)) and connected to the main distribution frame by means of two 1.6-A fuses
(see Figure 7-53).
The –48 V connectors from the MDFs can be combined as required. Ensure that the number
of MDFs connected at a fuse does not exceed the overall power requirement for each 1.6 A
fuse.
Stack 1

LTU.. 3

LTU.. 2

LTU.. 1

CSPCI
-48 V
TALK
PDPX2(1)
-48 V MDF
Figure 7-53 –48 V Connection Unit for MDF, Redundant

The main distribution frame connection of –48 V is the same as that described in the Section
7.13.2, “Connecting the MDF for a Non-Redundant, System, I.M.”, on page 7-30.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-67
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
PSDXE Connection

7.20 PSDXE Connection

Figure 7-54 shows the connectors in the PSDXE required for connecting the power supply and
the battery manager to the system.

PSDXE -48 V BULK

Power box 1 X7 BAMX2
(back view) X2
X6 BAMX1 -48 V TALK
NGA X3
PDPX2 -48 V BULK
Power box 2
X8 X1 ALIN
-48 V TALK NEW CAB
BAMX2 CSPCI shelf POWER
X9
Power box 2 BAEX NEW CAB SHARE

Battery IN

EBCCB
UBATT
NGA

BAMX1 PDPX2
Figure 7-54 PSDXE Connection

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-68 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch07.fm
For internal distribution only Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Calculating the Battery Cabling, I.M.

7.21 Calculating the Battery Cabling, I.M.

battery cable –––––– mm2 ––––––– System

power
cross section 162 252 352 502 702 952 2x702 at Uv

Stack 1 PSU2 15 23 32 46 65 84 130 46 A

+
Stack 2 PSU3 10 15 22 31 43 56 86 69 A
Cable
length 1.5 V
Stack 3 PSU4 (m) 23 A
+ PSU5 15 23 32 46 65 84 130 46 A
Stack 4
PSU6 10 15 22 31 43 56 86 69 A

Figure 7-55 Battery Cable Cross-Section

● Minimum system voltage 42.5 V at the BAEX module (in the BAMX1 in CABPSD)
● Permissible voltage drop (Uv) on the battery cable, from the terminal to the battery, if the
battery is to be discharged to 44V (1.83V/battery
● The system current is based on the power supply units output as follows:
– Maximum 2 UACDs with up to 6 power supply units (PSUs)
– For every PSU -->continuous load 23 A
– Maximum 23 A x n (PSU) (power supplies are in accordance to Figure 7-56)

Caution
7 If possible, the battery cable cross-section should not be less than 70 mm2, even in
configurations with fewer than 6 PSUs. A cross-section of at least 70 mm2 if the con-
figuration is subsequently expanded to the maximum of 6 PSUs in order to ensure
proofing against short-circuits. Expansions should always provide for a certain re-
serve, as otherwise, the battery cable must be reinforced or replaced if the voltage
drop (Uv) is exceeded at 1.5 V.

2 x # (m) x * (qty) x 23 (A) ?

= = ? mm2 per +/ - cable
1.5 (Uv) x 58(æ) 87

The formula must be supplemented with two #) = Distance between system & battery
values:
*) = Required number of PSUs
Figure 7-56 Formula for Calculating Battery Cable Cross-Section

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 7-69
montbuch07.fm

Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply For internal distribution only
Calculating the Battery Cabling, I.M.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
7-70 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch08.fm
For internal distribution only Internal Line Cables
Installing Signal Cables

8 Internal Line Cables

This chapter provides instructions for installing internal cables on the HiPath 4000 system.

8.1 Installing Signal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.1.1 Overview of CSPCI (RTM board) connection to L80XF/LTUW/AP 3700 (LTUCA board)
8-4
8.1.2 Overview of CSPCI Periphery Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.2 Connecting to the LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.3 Installing the Service Alarm Cable and Trunk Bypass on the HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

8.1 Installing Signal Cables

Signal cables are referred to as LTU signal cables. Signal cables should already be connected
when the system is shipped out of the factory. Should the cables become loose or removed dur-
ing transit, install the signal cables on the HiPath 4000 as follows:
1.

Caution
7 To avoid a short-circuit, ensure that the power on the system is off before con-
necting and removing the LTU cables.
2. Table 8-1 on page 8-1 contains an overview of the signal cable connections between the
LTUCA ports of the LTU/AP3700 expansion cabinets (see Figure 8-1 on page 8-2) and the
CSPCI backplane ports on the RTM board (see Figure 8-2 on page 8-2).

The following default cable lengths are used depending on the installation variant:
● 2 m (in stack 1)
● 5 m (from stack 2-4)
● 5 m or 10 m (if the CSPCI frame is installed in the external 19" frame)

System Type From To

Mono LTU.. 1 - LTU.. 15 (LTUCA mod. CCA) CSPCI RTM MOD. (SLOT 1/2)

Duplex LTU.. 1 - LTU.. 15 (LTUCA mod. CCA) CSPCI RTM MOD. (SLOT 2/3)
LTU.. 1 - LTU.. 15 (LTUCA mod. CCB) CSPCI RTM MOD. (SLOT 5/6)
Table 8-1 Signal Cable Connections

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 8-1
montbuch08.fm

Internal Line Cables For internal distribution only

Installing Signal Cables

Mono
LTUCA

LTU/
AP 3700 Duplex

HB
HA

CCB
CCA

W
W
RUNFAIL

Figure 8-1 LTUCA board in the LTU/AP 3700 shelf (CCA/CCB)

LTU/AP 3700 1-15

RTM mod.

MCM mod. Ref.clk. ALIN

ALUM

Figure 8-2 CSPCI backplane (RTM Board), example mono

The cables for trunk failure transfer, reference clock and alarm signaling are connected to the
MCM board.
3. All cables that lead to the main distribution frames (I.M.) must be attached to the relevant
stack frames with cable fasteners (see Figure 8-3 on page 8-3).

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
8-2 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch08.fm
For internal distribution only Internal Line Cables
Installing Signal Cables

This figure shows the cable attachment points

on the stack.

Figure 8-3 Attaching Cables on the HiPath 4000

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 8-3
montbuch08.fm

Internal Line Cables For internal distribution only

Installing Signal Cables

8.1.1 Overview of CSPCI (RTM board) connection to L80XF/LTUW/AP

3700 (LTUCA board)

C39195-
20 20 20 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
Z7211-A...

L80XF/LTUW/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP3700
Front CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC
LTUCA mod. A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A

CSPCI
LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU
Cab. connector LTU1 LTU2 LTU3 LTU4 LTU5 LTU6 LTU7 LTU8 LTU9 10 11 12 13 14 15
SLOT, rear
1st RTM, mono R1/2 R1/2 R1/2 R1/2 R1/2 R1/2 R1/2 R1/2 R1/2 R1/2 R1/2 R1/2 R1/2 R1/2 R1/2
or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or
1st RTM, duplex R2/3 R2/3 R2/3 R2/3 R2/3 R2/3 R2/3 R2/3 R2/3 R2/3 R2/3 R2/3 R2/3 R2/3 R2/3
2nd RTM, duplex R5/6 R5/6 R5/6 R5/6 R5/6 R5/6 R5/6 R5/6 R5/6 R5/6 R5/6 R5/6 R5/6 R5/6 R5/6

LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU

Cab. connector LTU1 LTU2 LTU3 LTU4 LTU5 LTU6 LTU7 LTU8 LTU9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Front CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC
LTUCA mod. B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
L80XF/LTUW/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP 3700

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
8-4 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch08.fm
For internal distribution only Internal Line Cables
Connecting to the LAN

8.1.2 Overview of CSPCI Periphery Connections

Service Adapt. f. LTUCA/ AICB, UACD MDF

1) Modem/ 2)
Terminal Periph. Box 3) / 4)

Front cable
Front cable

Front cable

Front cable

Rear

Rear

Rear

Rear

Rear
SLOT> 1/2/5 6
CSPCI Name/ -- RTM -- ---- MCM ----
Mod. ---- DSCXL ---- SF2X8
KAST name LAN V24 V24 LAN LAN5 V24 ref.clock ALIN ASW
8-8pos 9-9pos 9-24pos 8-8pos 8-8pos 9-9pos 25-25pos 10-10pos 1SU-open
C39195-Z7211-A.. 7...120 7...120 20...100
S30267-Z355-A.. 25 25
C39195-Z7602-A.. 30/100
S30267-Z19-A... 30
3)
S30267-Z317-A.. 50 ... 950
S30267-Z358-A..4) 50 ... 200
S30267-Z304-A.. 9

1) LAN 8 pos (connector/connector) 2) LAN 8 pos (connector/connector)

-> f. customer -> f. 8x customer
-> f. service -> f. 2x service
-> f. IPDA
-> f. Atlantic
3) Cable for ASW (alarm signaling), Ger/I.M. 4) Cable for ASW (alarm signaling), U.S.
5) 15 LAN cable for LTU1 ... LTU3700 (AP3700 -> 1 ... 15)
(see label on RTM panel)
cable lengths: 2 m, 5 m, 10 m

8.2 Connecting to the LAN

See Section 10.5.1, “Connecting External Devices for Teleworking”.

System cables with pre-stripped sections must be used for LTU frames. See also
> Section 4.4, “Shielding Connection on the Opening of the LTU Frame”.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 8-5
montbuch08.fm

Internal Line Cables For internal distribution only

Installing the Service Alarm Cable and Trunk Bypass on the HiPath 4000

8.3 Installing the Service Alarm Cable and Trunk Bypass on the
HiPath 4000
To install the service alarm cable and trunk bypass on the HiPath 4000:
The connectors for the alarm interface and trunk failure transfer are located on the MCM board
in the CSPCI frame (rear).
1. Connect the cable for trunk bypass (S30267-Z317-A*) to the 1SU connector (ALUM) on
the MCM board
2. Terminate this open-end cable properly at the MDF.
3. Connect the cable for the alarm interface (C39195-Z7904-A25) to the ALIN connector on
the MCM board and connect the other end of the cable to the ALIN connector on the UACD
cabinet (see also Figure 8-2 on page 8-2).

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
8-6 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch09.fm
For internal distribution only External Cabling Assemblies

9 External Cabling Assemblies

This chapter provides installation and cabling diagrams for the HiPath 4000 system. Diagrams
for the IPDA are located in the associated chapter. Unless otherwise noted, all diagrams apply
to both U.S. and I.M. installations.

9.1 MDFHX6 Assembly, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

9.1.1 Cabling from the LTU to the MDF, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.1.2 Cabling route from AP 3700-13 cabinet to the MDF (IM version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.2 MDFHX8 Assembly, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.2.1 Cabling from the LTU to the MDF, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.2.2 Cabling from AP 3700-13 cabinet to the MDF (IM version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.3 Overvoltage Protection of the Modules, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.4 MDF Cable Connections, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.5 Connecting the Signal or Alarm Cables to the MDF, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.6 Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9.6.1 Subscriber Line Module Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.6.1.1 Connecting the Subscriber Line Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9.6.2 Trunk Module Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
9.6.2.1 Connecting the Trunk Modules to the MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
9.6.2.2 Connection to MDF with DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
9.6.2.3 Connecting to the MDF with CDR and DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
9.6.2.4 Connecting to the MDF with CDR but without DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
9.7 Connecting CMI Fuse Modules, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
9.8 Creating a Strapping List, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9.8.1 System Assignment 16/24 DA Splitting Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
9.8.2 Network Assignment 25/35 DA Strapping Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
This section describes the assembly of the main distribution frames and the cables that must
be connected from the MDF splitting strips to the corresponding LTU/AP 3700 slots in the Hi-
Path 4000 (also refer to the cable plugging list that accompanies the system). Two different
MDFs can be used (MDFHX6/MDFHX 8) depending on the system configuration.

Caution
7 In new installations, always connect shielding wires. Do not modify existing shielding
wires if a main distribution frame is already being used. Do not use shielding wires
for ground distribution. Use the YV 2x0.5/0.9 jumper wires for jumpering.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 9-1
montbuch09.fm

External Cabling Assemblies For internal distribution only

MDFHX6 Assembly, I.M.

9.1 MDFHX6 Assembly, I.M.

Carrier for special modules

(ALUM relay, automatic cutout
etc.)
B

B/F:
Plate (attachment for internal
and external ground cable)
C
C01-C16:
24 DA splitting strips (internal
connections for system LTUE
network)

D001-D19:
A1 A2
35 DA strapping connectors
(external connections for server, A A3 PFT4
AC4, network and mail network)

Figure 9-1 MDFHX6 Assembly

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
9-2 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch09.fm
For internal distribution only External Cabling Assemblies
MDFHX6 Assembly, I.M.

9.1.1 Cabling from the LTU to the MDF, I.M.

Figure 9-2 shows the cabling diagram from the LTU to the MDF.

LTU.. 2
MDF 2 Back view

SLOT 121
SLOT 115
SLOT 108
SLOT 103
SLOT 097
SLOT 091
SLOT 085
SLOT 079

SLOT 067
SLOT 061
SLOT 055
SLOT 049
SLOT 043
SLOT 037
SLOT 031
SLOT 025
16 09 08 01

LTU.. 1
MDF 1
Back view

1 per 24 pair a/b 24

MDF splitting strip 16

MDF splitting strip 09

MDF splitting strip 08

1 24
MDF splitting strip 01
Figure 9-2 LTU to MDF Cabling

9.1.2 Cabling route from AP 3700-13 cabinet to the MDF (IM version)
Figure 9-3 shows the cabling route from the AP 3700-13 cabinet to the MDF.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 9-3
montbuch09.fm

External Cabling Assemblies For internal distribution only

MDFHX6 Assembly, I.M.

MDF 2 AP 3700-13 Box 2

Slot 7 on the backplane is

not assigned and is conse-
quently not counted for
MDF cable installation.

MDF 1 13 09 08 01

1 per 24 pair a/b

AP 3700-13
24
MDF splitting strip 13 Box 1
Back view

MDF splitting strip 09

MDF splitting strip 08

1 24
MDF splitting strip 01
Figure 9-3 Cabling route from AP 3700-13 cabinet to MDFHX6

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
9-4 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch09.fm
For internal distribution only External Cabling Assemblies
MDFHX8 Assembly, I.M.

9.2 MDFHX8 Assembly, I.M.

F/A:
Carrier for special modules 10
(ALUM relay, automatic cutout,
etc.)
B
B: C
Plate (attachment for internal
and external ground cable)

C01-C08:
24 DA splitting strips (internal A 01 A
connections for system CC80F,
L80XF, and RMS24 networks)
D001-D10:
35 DA strapping connectors
(external connections for server,
AC2, network and mail network) D
35 DA strapping connectors for
AC4, line and mail network
ECBPC fuse bar, 18 x 0-2-A fuses
for CMI power supply
Mounting plate for external cables F1 F2
F
and shielding wires

Figure 9-4 MDFHX8 Assembly

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 9-5
montbuch09.fm

External Cabling Assemblies For internal distribution only

MDFHX8 Assembly, I.M.

9.2.1 Cabling from the LTU to the MDF, I.M.

SLOT 121
SLOT 115
SLOT 109
SLOT 103
SLOT 097
SLOT 091
SLOT 085
SLOT 079

SLOT 067
SLOT 061
SLOT 055
SLOT 049
SLOT 043
SLOT 037
SLOT 031
SLOT 025
01 08 01 08

LTU..
MDF 2 Back

1 per 24 pair a/b 24

MDF splitting strip 08

1 24
MDF splitting strip 01

MDF 1
1 24
MDF splitting strip 08

1 24
MDF splitting strip 01
Figure 9-5 Cabling from the LTU to MDFHX8

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
9-6 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch09.fm
For internal distribution only External Cabling Assemblies
MDFHX8 Assembly, I.M.

9.2.2 Cabling from AP 3700-13 cabinet to the MDF (IM version)

Slot 7 on the backplane is

not assigned and is conse-
quently not counted for
MDF cable installation.

13 09 08 01
MDF 2
AP 3700-13
1 per 24 pair a/b 24 Box 1
MDF splitting strip 08 Back view

1 24
MDF splitting strip 01

MDF 1
1 24
MDF splitting strip 08

1 24
MDF splitting strip 01
Figure 9-6 Cabling from AP 3700-13 cabinet to MDFHX8

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 9-7
montbuch09.fm

External Cabling Assemblies For internal distribution only

Overvoltage Protection of the Modules, I.M.

9.3 Overvoltage Protection of the Modules, I.M.

Overvoltage protection is integrated in the module for 24DA cables. The cable connectors do
not contain any other overvoltage protection devices.
Where necessary, you can use overvoltage protectors to protect external cables to the main
distribution frame against atmospheric pressure.

SWU MDF
FPE cable in accordance
with VDE 0800 Part 2 to
VDE 0800 Teil2

Cable with overvoltage

KAST 24DA protection
TM../SLM.. in the MDF
Cable without over-
LTUW voltage protection
in the MDF

& = Splitting strip (MDFHX) C39334 - A166 - A1/A2

$ = Strapping connector (MDFHX)C39334 - A166 - A3/A7

Figure 9-7 Varistors and Overvoltage Protectors

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
9-8 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch09.fm
For internal distribution only External Cabling Assemblies
MDF Cable Connections, I.M.

9.4 MDF Cable Connections, I.M.

The PIN assignment between the LTUW backplane is different from is different to
> the cable connectors!

Connect Connect Connect

Pin Cable Pin Cable Pin Cable
Mod Cab Wire Cable Color Mod Cab Wire Cable Color Mod Cab Wire Cable Color
Pin Wire Ring Pin Wire Ring Pin Wire Ring
1 20 1a White--Blue 17 4 9a Red--Brown 43 58 17a Yellow--Orange
23 38 1b Blue--White 18 3 9b Brown--Red 44 57 17b Orange--Yellow
3 18 2a White-- Orange 19 2 10a Red--Gray 45 56 18a Yellow--Green
4 17 2b Orange--White 20 1 10b Gray--Red 46 55 18b Green--Yellow
5 16 3a White--Green 24 37 11a Black--Blue 47 54 19a Yellow--Brown
6 15 3b Green--White 25 36 11b Blue--Black 48 53 19b Brown--Yellow
7 14 4a White--Brown 26 35 12a Black--Orange 49 52 20a Yellow--Gray
8 13 4b Brown--White 27 34 12b Orange--Black 50 51 20b Gray--Yellow
9 12 5a White--Gray 29 32 13a Black--Green 51 50 21a Violet--Blue
10 11 5b Gray--White 30 31 13b Green--Black 52 49 21b Blue--Violet
11 10 6a Red--Blue 31 30 14a Black--Brown 53 48 22a Violet--Orange
12 9 6b Blue--Red 32 29 14b Brown--Black 54 47 22b Orange--Violet
13 8 7a Red--Orange 34 27 15a Black--Gray 55 46 23a Violet--Green
14 7 7b Orange--Red 35 26 15b Gray--Black 56 45 23b Green--Violet
15 6 8a Red--Green 37 24 16a Yellow--Blue 57 44 24a Violet--Brown
16 5 8b Green--Red 38 23 16b Blue--Yellow 58 43 24b Brown--Violet
Table 9-1 MDF 16DA/24DA Cabling

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 9-9
montbuch09.fm

External Cabling Assemblies For internal distribution only

Connecting the Signal or Alarm Cables to the MDF, I.M.

9.5 Connecting the Signal or Alarm Cables to the MDF, I.M.

To connect the signal or alarm cable to the MCM board (ALUM connector) and to the main dis-
tribution frame on splitting strip D1 (only on MDF1) refer to Table 9-2. For D1 splitting strip, see
Figure 9-1 on page 9-2).

ALUM/ Connect Cable Connect Signals

MCM Pin Pin ALUM
board
signals
CSPCI Mod. Cable Wire Cable Color Module/ CSPCI
Pin Wiring Cable
Pin
--- 1 20 1a White--Blue D5 ALUM1
--- 23 38 1b Blue--White E6 ALUM2
--- 3 18 2a White--Orange A4 NAL1
--- 4 17 2b Orange--White B5 NAL2
--- 5 16 3a White--Green A6 UAL1
--- 6 15 3b Green--White B7 UAL2
--- 7 14 4a White--Brown A9 0V
--- 8 13 4b Brown--White E1/9 0V
: : : : :: ---
ALUM1 26 35 12a Black--Orange ---
ALUM2 27 34 12b Orange--Black ---
NAL1 29 32 13a Black--Green ---
NAL2 30 31 13b Green--Black ---
UAL1 31 30 14a Black--Brown ---
UAL2 32 29 14b Brown--Black ---
Table 9-2 Pin Assignment for Signals or Alarms
ALUM (1/2) = Exchange line
NAL (1/2) = Minor alarm
UAL (1/2) = Major alarm

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
9-10 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch09.fm
For internal distribution only External Cabling Assemblies
Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

9.6 Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

Cable wiring on module

41
1 21 01
2 1a
3
4
5
X1 6
17a 1b 2a
7
8 17b 11a 2b
9
10 18a 11b 3a
1
2 18b 12a 3b
3
4 19a 12b 4a
5
X2 6
19b 4b
7
8 20a 13a 5a
9
10 20b 13b 5b
1
2 21a 14a 6a
3
4 21b 14b 6b 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 max.16x
5
X3 6
22a 7a 1 2 3 <--- BG-Slot. ---> 15 16 MDF cable
7
8 22b 15a 7b Wire 1 1
9
10 23a 15b 8a pair 24 DA
Front view
1 24DA 24 24
2 23b 8b
3
4 24a 16a 9a
5
X4 6
24b 16b 9b Module LTUW
7
8
9
10a S30804-B5367-X
10 10b
60 40 20
4 3 2 1 0

MDFHX (max. 24 DA)

16

1. -Wire pair- 8. 9. -Wire pair- 16. 17. -Wire pair- 24.

Splitting strip MDF

16 Cable

1
1. -Wire pair- 8. 9. -Wire pair- 16. 17. -Wire pair- 24.

Splitting
strip 1

Figure 9-8 Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 9-11
montbuch09.fm

External Cabling Assemblies For internal distribution only

Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

9.6.1 Subscriber Line Module Part Numbers

Table 9-3 lists the subscriber line modules and corresponding part numbers.

Part No. Board

Remarks
S30810- Abbreviation
-Q6194-X SLCSM
-Q2117-X SLMS
-Q2153-X SLMQ
-Q2153-X100 SLMQ
-Q2141-X SLMA
-Q2157-X SLMA
-Q2191-X SLMA3
-Q2246-X SLMA
-Q2151-X300 SLC16
-Q2193-X100 SLC24 Symmetrical signaling lines
-Q2193-X200 SLC24 Asymmetrical signaling lines
-Q2153-X SLMQ
-Q2153-X100 SLMQ
-Q2479-X SLMQ3
-Q2160-X STMA OWG-multimode
-Q2160-X100 STMA OWG-singlemode
-Q2163-X STMD2
-Q2163-X100 STMD2
-Q2168-X SLMO2
-Q2174-X STMD
-Q2177-X STHC
-Q2184-X SLMAB
-Q2169-X100 SLMOP
-Q2480-X SLMAR
-Q2168-X SLMO2
-Q2809-X SLMT
-Q2809-X100 SLMT
-Q2816-X SLMY
Table 9-3 Subscriber Line Modules and Part Numbers

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
9-12 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch09.fm
For internal distribution only External Cabling Assemblies
Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

Part No. Board

Remarks
S30810- Abbreviation
-Q2169-X STHC
-Q2303-X STMI
-Q2815-X STMVI
Table 9-3 Subscriber Line Modules and Part Numbers

9.6.1.1 Connecting the Subscriber Line Modules

Table 9-4 lists the line connections for the subscriber line modules.

..... Subscriber Circuits .....

ID/ HW Dial Mode Range Type of Operation per a/b
Part No. ID Damping Remarks Mo PE
DTM DP Prop ISD
S30810- F Dig. N d. Circu
it
MDF cable a/b no., circuit no. per module, wire identification per circuit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
SLC16 1 km LT - digital UPN 16 1
-Q2151-X 806XH X For local feed; 4 x B (32 Kbps)
- 801XH X dependent on cable + D (16 Kbps)
X300 type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
SLC24 1 km LT - digital UP0/E 24 1
-Q2193-X X For local feed; 4 x B (48 Kbps)
X dependent on cable + D (24 Kbps)
type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
SLMA 2 x 750 Ohm TS - analog Dual SICOFI 16 1
-Q2141-X 001XH X X 0 dB ± 0.3 dB
7 dB ± 0.3 dB for DP and DTMF terminals
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Table 9-4 Subscriber Line Module Connections (Sheet 1 of 4)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 9-13
montbuch09.fm

External Cabling Assemblies For internal distribution only

Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

..... Subscriber Circuits .....

ID/ HW Dial Mode Range Type of Operation per a/b
Part No. ID Damping Remarks Mo PE
DTM DP Prop ISD
S30810- F Dig. N d. Circu
it
MDF cable a/b no., circuit no. per module, wire identification per circuit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
SLMA 2 x 750 Ohm TS - analog Dual SICOFI 16 1
-Q2157-X 005XH X X 3 dB ± 0.3 dB
- 9 dB ± 0.3 dB for DP and DTMF terminals
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
SLMAR 2 x 600 Ohm TS - analog Quad- SICOFI 8 1
-Q2480-X EB0XH X X 3 dB ± 0.3 dB
(FRG) for DP and DTMF terminals
-10 dB ± 0.3 dB
(FRG)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b
SLMA2 2 x 600 Ohm TS - analog Quad- SICOFI 24 1
-Q2246-X EC0XH X X 3 dB ± 0.3 dB
(FRG) for DP and DTMF terminals
-10 dB ± 0.3 dB
(FRG)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
SLMOP 1 km TS - digital UP0/E 24 1
-Q2180-X 009XH X X For local feed; 2 x B (64 Kbps)
dependent on cable + D (16 Kbps)
resistance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
SLMO2 1 km TS - digital UP0/E 24 1
-Q2168-X 80FXH X X For local feed; 2 x B (64 Kbps)
dependent on cable + D (16 Kbps)
resistance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Table 9-4 Subscriber Line Module Connections (Sheet 2 of 4)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
9-14 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch09.fm
For internal distribution only External Cabling Assemblies
Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

..... Subscriber Circuits .....

ID/ HW Dial Mode Range Type of Operation per a/b
Part No. ID Damping Remarks Mo PE
DTM DP Prop ISD
S30810- F Dig. N d. Circu
it
MDF cable a/b no., circuit no. per module, wire identification per circuit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
SLMQ 5.5 ... 9 km TS - digital or 2B1Q-Uk0 16 1
-Q2133-X 078XH X For local feed; NT PABX or
dependent on cable 2 x B (64 Kbps)
resistance LT-+NT operation + D
(16 Kbps)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
SLMQ 5.5 ... 9 km LT - digital or 2B1Q-Uk0 16 1
-Q2153-X 07AXH X X For local feed; LT-+NT operation
- 07CXH X X dependent on cable 2 x B (64 kbit/s) + D (64 kbit/
X100 resistance s)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
SLMS Point to point: TS - digital S0 8 2
-Q2117-X 079XH X 1000 m 2 x B (64 kbit/s)
Bus mode c: + D (16 Kbps)
500 m R=receive, T=transmit
Bus mode d:
150 m
(c=concentrated,
d=distributed)
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a0 a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 a8 a9 a10 a11 a12 a13 a14 a15
b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 b9 b10 b11 b12 b13 b14 b15
S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0
R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T
STMD 1000 m TS/AS - digital ISDN, S0 8 2
-Q2174-X 077XH X (to NT) 2 x B (64 kbit/s)
+ D (16 Kbps)
R=receive, T=transmit
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a0 a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 a8 a9 a10 a11 a12 a13 a14 a15
b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 b9 b10 b11 b12 b13 b14 b15
S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0
R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T
Table 9-4 Subscriber Line Module Connections (Sheet 3 of 4)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 9-15
montbuch09.fm

External Cabling Assemblies For internal distribution only

Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

..... Subscriber Circuits .....

ID/ HW Dial Mode Range Type of Operation per a/b
Part No. ID Damping Remarks Mo PE
DTM DP Prop ISD
S30810- F Dig. N d. Circu
it
MDF cable a/b no., circuit no. per module, wire identification per circuit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
STHC 1000 m TS/AS - digital UP0/E 16 1
-Q2177-X 375XH X (extended bus 2 x B (64 kbit/s) S0 4 2
500 m + D (16 Kbps)
short bus 150 m R=receive, T=transmit
in subscriber
mode)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a0 a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 a8 a9 a10 a11 a12 a13 a14 a15 a16 a17 a18 a19 a20 a21 a22 a23
b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 b9 b10 b11 b12 b13 b14 b15 b16 b17 b18 b19 b20 b21 b22 b23
S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0
R T R T R T R T
STMD2 1000 m TS/AS - digital ISDN, S0 8 2
-Q2163-X 075XH X (to NT) 2 x B (64 kbit/s)
- 074XH + D (16 Kbps)
X100 R=receive, T=transmit
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a0 a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 a8 a9 a10 a11 a12 a13 a14 a15
b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 b9 b10 b11 b12 b13 b14 b15
S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0
R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T
Table 9-4 Subscriber Line Module Connections (Sheet 4 of 4)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
9-16 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch09.fm
For internal distribution only External Cabling Assemblies
Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

9.6.2 Trunk Module Part Numbers

Table 9-5 lists the trunk module and corresponding part number.

Part Number Board Abbreviation Remarks

S30810-
-Q2012-X100 TMEM
-Q2064-X100 TMLR
-Q2066-X TMAU
-Q2092-X TMEMW
-Q2092-X100 TMEMW
-Q2092-X200 TMEMW
-Q2121-X TMBCT
-Q2121-X100 TMBCT
-Q2123-X TMLBL
-Q2123-X100 TMLBL
-Q2138-X TMBLN
-Q2147-X TMSFP
-Q2147-X300 TMSFP
-Q2147-X400 TMSFP
-Q2159-X100 TM2LP
-Q2159-X110 TM2LP
-Q2159-X120 TM2LP
-Q2159-X130 TM2LP
-Q2159-X140 TM2LP
-Q2159-X150 TM2LP
-Q2159-X160 TM2LP
-Q2159-X170 TM2LP
-Q2159-X180 TM2LP
-Q2452-X TMDID
-Q2186-X100 TMLRB
-Q2216-X DIU2U
-Q2286-X TMLRB
-Q2214-X100 TMOM2
-Q2288-X TMCOW
Table 9-5 Trunk Module and Part Numbers (Sheet 1 of 2)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 9-17
montbuch09.fm

External Cabling Assemblies For internal distribution only

Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

Part Number Board Abbreviation Remarks

S30810-
-Q2288-X10 TMCOW
-Q2288-X20 TMCOW
-Q2288-X40 TMCOW
-Q2288-X50 TMCOW
-Q2288-X60 TMCOW
-Q2288-X100 TMCOW
-Q2288-X120 TMCOW
-Q2288-X130 TMCOW
-Q2288-X310 TMCOW
-Q2292-X100 TMEW2
-Q2476-X TM3WO
-Q2477-X TM3WI
-Q2469-X TMEMUS
-Q24685-X TMC16
Table 9-5 Trunk Module and Part Numbers (Sheet 2 of 2)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
9-18 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch09.fm
For internal distribution only External Cabling Assemblies
Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

9.6.2.1 Connecting the Trunk Modules to the MDF

Table 9-6 lists the trunk module connections to the MDF.

..... Trunk Circuits .....

ID/ HW Dial Mode Range Type of Operation per a/b
Part No. ID DTM DP DP 2.W Damping Remarks mo per
S30810- F 1.6: 2:1 T lL = Long cable d. Circu
or 1 kL = Short cable it
MFC
MDF cable a/b no., circuit no. per module, wire identification per circuit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TMBCT WES-SIG Tie-line circuit - WES and 4 1
-Q2121-X 034XH 0.8 wire -->50 km tie-line circuit - local battery
0.6 wire --> 35 km SICOFI
- 033XH 0.4 wire --> 20 km without signalling method
X100
Main PBX tie trunk/satellite
PBX tie trunk - WTK1SICOFI
with signalling method.
1 - 2 - 3 - 4 -
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a
b b b b
TMEM 2 x 1000 Ohm Tie-line circuit with E&M, CF 4 3
-Q2012- 021XH X - 3.5/- 3.5 dBr code and
X100 WTK1
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 - - - -
------ --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
ka ka ka ka ga ga ga ga E E E E
kb kb kb kb gb gb gb gb M M M M
Table 9-6 Connection to MDF (Sheet 1 of 4)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 9-19
montbuch09.fm

External Cabling Assemblies For internal distribution only

Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

..... Trunk Circuits .....

ID/ HW Dial Mode Range Type of Operation per a/b
Part No. ID DTM DP DP 2.W Damping Remarks mo per
S30810- F 1.6: 2:1 T lL = Long cable d. Circu
or 1 kL = Short cable it
MFC
MDF cable a/b no., circuit no. per module, wire identification per circuit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TMEMW 2 x 1000 Ohm Tie-line circuit with E&M and 4 4
-Q2092-X 026XH DT X X X CF code
-X100 027XH MF SICOFI
-X200 026XH With strap option

Assignment:
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 -
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---------------
AE AE AE AE AM AM AM AM E E E E MA MA MA MA <--
BE BE BE BE BM BM BM BM M M M M MB MB MB MB Standard
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---------------
T T T T T1 T1 T1 T1 E E E E - - - - <--
R R R R R1 R1 R1 R1 M M M M - - - - Type I
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---------------
Fan Fan Fan Fan Fab Fab Fab Fab - - - - - - - - <--
A A A A A A A A San SanSanSan - - - - Type Ia
B B B B B B B B Sab SabSabSab - - - - -
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---------------
T T T T T1 T1 T1 T1 E E E E M M M M <--
R R R R R1 R1 R1 R1 SG SG SG SG SB SB SB SB Type II
Table 9-6 Connection to MDF (Sheet 2 of 4)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
9-20 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch09.fm
For internal distribution only External Cabling Assemblies
Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

..... Trunk Circuits .....

ID/ HW Dial Mode Range Type of Operation per a/b
Part No. ID DTM DP DP 2.W Damping Remarks mo per
S30810- F 1.6: 2:1 T lL = Long cable d. Circu
or 1 kL = Short cable it
MFC
MDF cable a/b no., circuit no. per module, wire identification per circuit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TMEW2 2 x 1000 Ohm Tie-line circuit with E&M and 4 4
-Q2292- 029XH DT X X X CF code
X100 MF SICOFI
With strap option
Assignment:

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 -
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---------------
AE AE AE AE AM AM AM AM E E E E MA MA MA MA <--
BE BE BE BE BM BM BM BM M M M M MB MB MB MB Standard
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---------------
T T T T T1 T1 T1 T1 E E E E - - - - <--
R R R R R1 R1 R1 R1 M M M M - - - - Type I
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---------------
Fan Fan Fan Fan Fab Fab Fab Fab - - - - - - - - <--
A A A A A A A A SanSan SanSan - - - - Type Ia
B B B B B B B B SabSab SabSab - - - - -
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---------------
T T T T T1 T1 T1 T1 E E E E M M M M <--
R R R R R1 R1 R1 R1 SG SG SG SG SB SB SB SB Type II
TMLBL 2 x 9 KOhm Local battery bidirectional 8 1
-Q2123-X 43AXH DT -7/-0 dB COFI
MF lL: -0/-7 dB No direct inward dialing
kL: -5/-2 dB (DID)
- 436XH -7/-0 dB
X100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b
TMLR 2 x 1000 Ohm Tie-line circuit - direct 2 1
-Q2064- 0A5XH DTM X depending on current loop
X100 F remote system; Bi-directional SICOFI

1 - 2 -
--- --- --- ---
a a
b b
Table 9-6 Connection to MDF (Sheet 3 of 4)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 9-21
montbuch09.fm

External Cabling Assemblies For internal distribution only

Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

..... Trunk Circuits .....

ID/ HW Dial Mode Range Type of Operation per a/b
Part No. ID DTM DP DP 2.W Damping Remarks mo per
S30810- F 1.6: 2:1 T lL = Long cable d. Circu
or 1 kL = Short cable it
MFC
MDF cable a/b no., circuit no. per module, wire identification per circuit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TMOM2 a/b > 17 mA APSE QUAD-SICOFI 4 3
-Q2214- 051XH DT X max. 2 x 500 / 1000 (adapter for special
MF Ohm equipment)
X100 (depending on Paging equipment, dictation
partner) equipment, TERM, ELA,
c-wire max. NWS, announcement
200Ohm equipment, QU, and
(with 3-wire outgoing loop monitoring
connection)
-0/-7dBr
1 3 2 4 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a J D J D J D J D
b b b b P C P C P C P C
TMSFP -4.0/-4.0 dBr Tie-line circuit with DTMF 8 2
-Q2147-X 43BXH DTM X X -3.5/-3.5 dBr signaling Dual SICOFI 4Dr
- 43EXH F *) *) : 2600 Hz
x300 43FXH -6.0/-1.0 dBr 1200/1600 Hz
- -7.0/-0.0 dBr 2100 Hz
x400 600/750 Hz *) DTMF signaling

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
Fan Fab Fan Fab Fan Fab Fan Fab Fan Fab Fan Fab Fan Fab Fan Fab
AE AM AE AM AE AM AE AM AE AM AE AM AE AM AE AM
BE BM BE BM BE BM BE BM BE BM BE BM BE BM BE BM
0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7
Table 9-6 Connection to MDF (Sheet 4 of 4)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
9-22 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch09.fm
For internal distribution only External Cabling Assemblies
Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

9.6.2.2 Connection to MDF with DID

Table 9-7 lists the trunk connections to the MDF with DID.

..... Trunk Circuits .....

ID / HW Dial Mode DID Range Type of Operation per a/b
Part No. ID DTM DP DP 2.W Damping Remarks mo per
S30810- F 1.6: 2:1 T lL = Long cable d. Circu
or 1 kL = Short cable it
MFC
MDF cable a/b no., circuit no. per module, wire identification per circuit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TMLRB DP, 2 x 1000 Ohm Trunk circuit with DID 8 1.5
-Q2286-X 460XH DTMF, lL: -8/+2 dBr SICOFI
MFC kL: -5/-1 dBr incoming/outgoing
R2; lL: -7.9/-2.9 dBr feed in CPBX
SocotelkL: -4.9/-5.9 dBr
-5/-2 dBr
1 3 5 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 4 6 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a bu bu bu bu
b b b b b b b b bu bu bu bu
TM3WI DT 2 x 1500 Ohm Trunk circuit with DID 4 1
-Q2477-X EEFXH MF - 3.5/ -1 dBr SICOFI
C X X incoming
sig Loop code and
n rering evaluation
1 2 3 4
--- --- --- ---
a a a a
b b b b
b1 b1 b1 b1
TM3WO DT 2 x 1500 Ohm Trunk circuit 4 2
-Q2476-X EEEXH MF X X -3.5/-6 dBr QUAD-SICOFI 3Dr
MF Outgoing
C Local exchange
sign
1 - 1 - 2 - 2 - 3 - 3 - 4 - 4 -
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a c a c a c a c
b b b b
Table 9-7 Connection to MDF with DID

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 9-23
montbuch09.fm

External Cabling Assemblies For internal distribution only

Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

9.6.2.3 Connecting to the MDF with CDR and DID

..... Trunk Circuits .....

Ident./ HW Dial Mode for CDR DID Range Type of per a/b
Part No. ID CO Damping Operation mo per
S30810- DTM DP DP 2.W 50 12 16 Sil lL = Long Remarks d. circu
F 1.6: 2:1 T Hz kHz kHz Rev cable it
or 1 kL = Short
MFC cable
MDF cable a/b no., circuit no. per module, wire identification per circuit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TMAU UEFS 2x500 Ohm Trunk circuit 3 3
-Q2066-X 0A2XH X X X WS48 -6 /-1 dB COFI
BFA with DID
Universal
TMAU UEFS 2x500 Ohm Trunk circuit 3 3
-Q2066-X 0A2XH X X X WS48 -6 /-1 dB COFI
BFA with DID
Universal
TMBLN ALS70 2 x 500 Trunk circuit 8 1
-Q2138-X 04AXH DT X X (DTMF) Ohm SICOFI
MF -7/ 0 dBr with/without
-6/-1 dBr DID
-5/-2 dBr Uni- or bi-
-4/-3 dBr directional
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b
TM2LP AS QSICOFI 8 1
-Q2159- 480XH DID
X100 481XH DID
- 482XH X X X X X DID/
X110 483XH X X X X X X X DOD MSI
- 484XH X X X X X X X MSI
X120 485XH X X X X X X X MSI
- 486XH X X X X X X X MSI
X130 487XH X X X X X X MSI
-
X140
-
X150
-
X160
-
X170
X180
Table 9-8 Connection to the MDF with CDR and DID (Sheet 1 of 2)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
9-24 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch09.fm
For internal distribution only External Cabling Assemblies
Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

..... Trunk Circuits .....

Ident./ HW Dial Mode for CDR DID Range Type of per a/b
Part No. ID CO Damping Operation mo per
S30810- DTM DP DP 2.W 50 12 16 Sil lL = Long Remarks d. circu
F 1.6: 2:1 T Hz kHz kHz Rev cable it
or 1 kL = Short
MFC cable
MDF cable a/b no., circuit no. per module, wire identification per circuit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1 3 5 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 4 6 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a bu bu bu bu
b b b b b b b b bu bu bu bu
Table 9-8 Connection to the MDF with CDR and DID (Sheet 2 of 2)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 9-25
montbuch09.fm

External Cabling Assemblies For internal distribution only

Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

9.6.2.4 Connecting to the MDF with CDR but without DID

Table 9-9 lists the trunk connections to the MDF with CDR but without DID.

..... Trunk Circuits .....

ID/ HW Dial Mode for CDR Range
Type of Operation per a/b
Part No. ID CO Damping Remarks Mo per
S30810- DTM DP DP 2.W 50 12 16 Sil lL = Long cable d. Circu
F 1.6: 2:1 T Hz kHz kHz Rev kL = Short cable it
or 1
MFC
MDF cable a/b no., circuit no. per module, wire identification per circuit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TMCOW 2x185-530Ohm DUAL-SICOFI 8 1
(J = 20 mA) Trunk circuit
-Q2288-X 450XH X X X X kL: -5/-2 dB MSI
lL: -7/ 0 dB Without DID
-X10 451XH X X X X X lL: -6/-1 dB Incoming and
-X20 452XH X X X X X kL: -4/-3 dB Outgoing
-X40 454XH X X X X f -3/-4 dB Loop start
f -4/-3 dB Ground start
-X50 45CXH X X X X d -4,5/-2,5 dB Loop monitoring
-X60 458XH X X X X -7/0 dB and pole
0/-7 dB changing
--------------------------------------------------
- 459XH X X X X -5/-2 dB -----------

X120 45AXH X X X X -7/0 dB f = 4 different

- -5/-2 dB d = 2 different
X130 -6/0 dB (Austr) Impedance
-9/3 dB (Austr) combinations
457XH X X X X -5/-2 dB (ITL)
-6/-1 dB (ITL)
- -5.75/-lL: -8/+2
45FXH X X X
X310
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b
TMLRB 1400 Ohm DUAL-SICOFI 8 1
-Q2186- 561XH X X -6/-1 dBr Trunk circuit with
X100 DID
BPO loop signal.
Ground signal
recognition
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b
Table 9-9 Trunk Connection to the MDF with CDR but without DID

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
9-26 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch09.fm
For internal distribution only External Cabling Assemblies
Connecting CMI Fuse Modules, I.M.

9.7 Connecting CMI Fuse Modules, I.M.

Figure 9-9 shows an example of a CMI fuse module connection and strapping.

Fuse module S30807-K6138-X1

Si10

Si11

Si12

Si13

Si14

Si15

Si16
Si2

Si3

Si4

Si5

Si8

Si9
Si1

Si6

Si7

Si1 Si16

0 V -48 V

SLC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

a
b
a/b fuse/0V a/b fuse/0V
1 16
Strap. con 35Da C39104-A7001-D351

Figure 9-9 CMI Fuse Module Connection and Jumpering Example

To connect the CMI fuse module, insert it in slot A1or A3 on the main distribution frame (see
Figure 9-1 on page 9-2).

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 9-27
montbuch09.fm

External Cabling Assemblies For internal distribution only

Creating a Strapping List, I.M.

9.8 Creating a Strapping List, I.M.

To create a list of all positions that are necessary in the MDF:
1. Use the tables in Section 9.8.1 on page 9-29 and Section 9.8.2 on page 9-30 as templates
to strapping the MDF.
You can also query the assignment of positions with the AMOs SBCSU and SCSU.
2. Include these lists with the customer documentation. These are the current working docu-
ments for activities performed on the MDF.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
9-28 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 MDF Pin (a/b) BGR
SLO SLO
1 / 3 / 5 / 7 / 9 / 11/ 13/ 15/ 17/ 19/ 21/ 23/ 25/ 27/ 29/ 31/ 33/ 35/ 37/ 39/ 41/ 43/ 45/ 47/

9.8.1
T T
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
C
016
C
015
C
014
C
013
For internal distribution only

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
012

HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions

C
011
C
010
C
009
C
008
C
007
C
006
C
005
System Assignment 16/24 DA Splitting Strip

C
004
C
003
C
002
C
001
Da 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 a-b

9-29
montbuch09.fm

Creating a Strapping List, I.M.

External Cabling Assemblies
montbuch09.fm

External Cabling Assemblies For internal distribution only

Creating a Strapping List, I.M.

9.8.2 Network Assignment 25/35 DA Strapping Connector

1 / 3 / 5 / 7 / 9 / 11/ 13/ 15/ 17/ 19/ 21/ 23/ 25/ 27/ 29/ 31/ 33/ 35/ 37/ 39/ 41/ 43/ 45/ 47/ 49/ 51/ 53/ 55/ 57/ 59/ 61/ 63/ 65/ 67/ 69/
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70
Pin (a/b)

Slot - D 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
9-30 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch10.fm
For internal distribution only Installing Peripheral Equipment

10 Installing Peripheral Equipment

10.1 Installing the AC4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.1.1 Verifying the Site Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.1.2 Installing the AC4 Handset Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.1.3 Installing the AC Cables to the Controller Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
10.1.4 Installing the AC4 Keyboard Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
10.1.5 Cabling of the AC4 Attendant Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10.1.6 Connecting the AC4 to the UAE6 Terminal Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.1.7 AC4 Ordering Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.1.8 AC4 Order Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
10.1.9 Connecting the AC4 to the UCON (World) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.1.10 Powering On the AC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10.2 Connecting the Internal Clock Box AICB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10.3 Connecting the Service Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10.4 Hicom Teleservice HTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
10.5 Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
10.5.1 Connecting External Devices for Teleworking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
10.5.2 Connecting ISDN Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
10.5.2.1 PNE/PBXXX Back-to-Back with Modem and DIUN2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
10.5.2.2 PNE/PBXXX Back-to-Back with Modem and DIUN2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
10.5.2.3 PNE/PBXXX Back-to-Back in Single-Card Box with DIUN2. . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
10.5.2.4 PNE/PBXXX Back to Back with Modem in DIUS2 Emulation with DIUN2 . 10-20
10.5.2.5 CDG/PBXXX as Gateway, Fully Integrated Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
10.5.2.6 CDG/PBXXX with DIUN2 as Gateway, Partially Integrated Mode . . . . . . . 10-21
10.5.3 Cordless Multicell Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
10.6 Installing the Breakout Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
10.7 Installing the Distance Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
10.8 Installing and Configuring the HiPath ProCenter Server Message Stream . . . . . . . 10-30
10.9 Installing the Music-on-Hold Interface Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
10.10 Installing the Optiset E Adapter Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 10-1
montbuch10.fm

Installing Peripheral Equipment For internal distribution only

Installing the AC4

10.1 Installing the AC4

Caution
7 The shielding of all front cables must be bonded at the shelf opening with two ca-
bles fasteners for every frame (with the exception of network cables and optical fibre
cables).
This section provides procedures for installing the AC4.
The AC4 is a device that is used by an attendant to set up external and internal calls. Figure 10-
1 shows the connectivity diagram of the AC4.

Required interface
UP0/E
AC-4
HiPath 4000
+/- 48 V
SLMO
Approximate range: 1 km

UP0/E U U2B1Q
AC-4 C
O Approximate range: 8 km SLMQ
N

Figure 10-1 AC4 Connectivity Diagram

10.1.1 Verifying the Site Requirements

The following power requirements must be met before the AC4 is installed:
● The AC4 must be located within 4 m (12 ft.) of the nearest 120 Vac receptacle.
● The power receptacle for the AC4 must be 120 Vac at 50 or 60 hertz (Hz).
The wire gauge used varies according to the distance between the AC4 and the system.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
10-2 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch10.fm
For internal distribution only Installing Peripheral Equipment
Installing the AC4

Table 5-2 lists the MDF requirements for the AC4.

AWG Wire Size Board Type Distance

No. 22 and 24 AWG SLMO 1000 m
SLMQ 1000 m
Table 10-1 Wire Sizes and Distances from the AC4 to the System

10.1.2 Installing the AC4 Handset Cord

The AC4 handset is equipped with a 2 m (6 ft.) cord.
To install the AC4 handset cord:
1. Place the AC4 on the work station table.
2. Connect the attendant’s handset cord to the left jack of the AC4 keyboard (see Figure 10-
2 on page 10-4). Depending on the attendant’s preference, a headset can be used in place
of the handset.

>
The attendant’s handset and headset cannot be connected at the same time. An
AC4 headset adapter is required with each headset. Follow local ordering proce-
dures to order the headset and headset adapter.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 10-3
montbuch10.fm

Installing Peripheral Equipment For internal distribution only

Installing the AC4

1
2

5 4

1 - Keyboard
2 - Handset and cradle
3 - Power supply
4 - Line cord
5 - Headset adapter
6 - Monitor

Figure 10-2 AC4 Components

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
10-4 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch10.fm
For internal distribution only Installing Peripheral Equipment
Installing the AC4

10.1.3 Installing the AC Cables to the Controller Assembly

To install the cords to the controller assembly:
1. Place the AC4 on the work station table.
2. Turn the AC4 to its side (see Figure 10-3 on page 10-5).
3. Plug the power supply cord into the power supply cord receptacle labeled 2.
4. Plug the other end of the power supply cord into the wall outlet.
5. Plug other devices to the corresponding jacks labeled in Figure 10-3 on page 10-5.

1 2 3 4
3

1 - Line cord
2 - Power supply
3 - Magnetic tape
4 - Maintenance terminal for the blind

Figure 10-3 AC4 Jacks (Back View)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 10-5
montbuch10.fm

Installing Peripheral Equipment For internal distribution only

Installing the AC4

10.1.4 Installing the AC4 Keyboard Template

To install the AC4 keyboard template (Figure 10-4):
1. Remove the adhesive backing from the back of the template.
2. Using the LEDs as guides, align the template.
3. Press down firmly around the template until it is properly positioned.

Figure 10-4 AC4 Keyboard Template

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
10-6 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch10.fm
For internal distribution only Installing Peripheral Equipment
Installing the AC4

10.1.5 Cabling of the AC4 Attendant Console

SWU Uv = 6 V Voltage on
MDF AC4:
Umin=36V
LTUW KAST

UP0/E
SLMO
The maximum number of AC4
consoles that can be
connected per SLMO is 6

Attendant console with Braille unit and magnetic tape (MT)

3: Display #)

8, 9: Open listening
hand-
set with adapter #, a)
1, 2: ACK4
keyboard #)
7: head Board: ACC4
set #)

4, 5, 6: Handset
with cradle and cable #)
20:Terminal box #, c)
23: Adapter
cable #, d)
230 V ∼ 21: Cable a/b #)
48 V =
22: Adapter ca- 9 V∼ 230 V ∼
31, 32: Power supply unit #) 24: Adapter ble #, d)
cable #) 10, 11: Plug-in power supply
40: Connecting
cord #) #, b)

30: BBLIS
braille terminal #) MT
Items 1 through 6, 10, 11 and 21 are supplied with the AC4
#) For serial numbers of devices and cables, refer to the “AC4 Order Numbers” table
a) Handset with open listening for training purposes only
b) Plug-in power supply 10, 11 for backlit display
c) AC4 connection by means of a terminal box, see Figure “AC4 by means of terminal box UAE6”
(optionally with UCON, see Figure “AC4 connection to UCON (WORLD)”)
d) Adapter cable 22, 23 to ensure compatibility with AC/AC2/AC3
Figure 10-5 AC4 Cabling Overview

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 10-7
montbuch10.fm

Installing Peripheral Equipment For internal distribution only

Installing the AC4

10.1.6 Connecting the AC4 to the UAE6 Terminal Box

Supply by means of T/R wires

HiPath 4000
AC4 1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6
a
b a/b reversible

System Cable 1 UAE 6

UAE 6 =Terminal box AP: C39334-Z7052-C23

Cable1 = Connecting cord (9 m): C39195-Z7205-A100

Figure 10-6 AC4 connection to the UAE6 Terminal Box

10.1.7 AC4 Ordering Packages

Figure 10-6 lists the ordering packages for the AC4.

device Part number

AC4 Canada/U.S.A S30807-H5478-X
AC4 China S30807-H5478-C
AC4 Telekom S30807-H5478-X1
AC4 Thailand S30807-H5478-D
AC4 UK S30807-H5478-B
AC4 WORLD S30807-H5478-X
Table 10-2 Order Packages

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
10-8 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch10.fm
For internal distribution only Installing Peripheral Equipment
Installing the AC4

10.1.8 AC4 Order Numbers

Table 10-3 lists the order numbers for the AC4 components.

Serial Name /Description Abbre- Part number

No. viation
WORLD attendant console AC4 S30807-H5478-X
1 WORLD keyboard (pictograms) ACK4 S30807-S5478-X
2 UK keyboard (Eng. abbrev.) ACK4 S30807-S5478-B
3 Display housing (with display) C30807-D5478-X
4 Handset S30122-X7310-X
5 Handset cable C39363-A7007-C2
6 Handset receptacle C39363-A7007-C4
7 PLANTRONICS headset with cable S30122-K5320-X
8 Monitoring handset S30122-X7310-X
9 Monitoring handset adapter C39195-Z7206-A8
Plug-in power supply unit 120 Vac S30122-X7311-
X200
10 Plug-in power supply unit 230 Vac/9 Vac S30122-X7311-X
11 (background lighting)
Plug-in power supply unit 230 Vac/9 Vac (UK) S30122-X7311-
(background lighting) X100
20 Terminal box in Putz type UAE 6 (a/b) C39334-Z7052-C23
21 AC4 cable --> terminal box, 9 m (a/b) C39195-Z7205-
22 TAPE OUT adapter cable A100
S30267-Z313-A2
23 V.24 adapter cable S30267-Z344-A2
24 BBLIS Power adapter cable C39195-Z7207-A2
30 BBLIS braille line (blind operator Braille unit) with BBLIS S30122-K5057-X
cable
31 Power supply unit 230 Vac/48 Vdc (for BBLIS) PSU 48 S30122-K5484-X3
WORLD
32 Power supply unit 230 Vac/48 Vdc (for BBLIS) UK PSU 48 S30122-K5484-X4
40 Connection cord AC4 --> MB (8-pin) (MB accessories)
Table 10-3 AC4 Order Numbers

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 10-9
montbuch10.fm

Installing Peripheral Equipment For internal distribution only

Installing the AC4

10.1.9 Connecting the AC4 to the UCON (World)

SWU
MDF
LTUW KAST
1

SLMQ
(U2B1Q)

(U2B1Q)

5 B
UP0/E D
AC4

A
(U2B1Q) max.100m
3 3 Using the UCON (optiset E distance
adapter), the AC4 connection can be up to
8000 meters long (U2B1Qlink) depending on
UCON M the type of cable used.
(UCON S) C
8 230 V∼
PSU
9
7
230 V∼
PSP
6
1 = MDF cable 16x2x0.4 A= Universal
A= Universal connecting
connecting unit
unit
UAE 8/8
UAE 8/8 AP:
AP: L30460-X
L30460-X 951-X,
951-X,
3 = UCON S/M: 1 connecting cord (6-wire, 6 m) is UP:
UP: -X 952-X,
-X 952-X,
supplied, additional ones have to be ordered: V30146-A6012- AP/UP:
AP/UP: -X 958-X
-X 958-X
D3 (6 m) B= Attendant
Attendant console
console AC4
AC4
5 =AC4 connecting cord (6-wire): C39195-Z7205-A100 (9 ) B=
S30807-H5478-X
S30807-H5478-X
6 =UCON S plug-in power supply models: C= UCON
C= UCON M M adapter
adapter (optiset
(optiset E
E distance
distance
PSP1, Europe S30122-K5061-X-2 (CE) adapter Multi):
adapter Multi): S30807-U5467-X or
PSP2, United Kingdom S30122-K5062-X-1 S30807-U5467-X or
PSP3, China S30122-K5063-X-1 UCON S adapter (optiset E distance
UCON SSingle)
adapter adapter (optiset E distance
S30807-U5467-X100
7 =UCON M power supply unit: PSUS30122-K5484-X adapter Single) S30807-U5467-X100
(comes with PSU connecting cables and D= Terminal box UAE 6 AP
PSU power cable with grounding plug) D= C39195-Z7052-C23
Terminal box UAE 6 AP
C39195-Z7052-C23
8 =PSU connecting cable C39195-A7001-A45 (3 m)
9 =PSU power cable C39195-A7001-C11 (Schuko)
C39195-A7001-C32 (UK)
Figure 10-7 AC4 Connection to UCON (World)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
10-10 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch10.fm
For internal distribution only Installing Peripheral Equipment
Installing the AC4

10.1.10 Powering On the AC4

To power on the AC4:
1. Attach the AC4 power cord to the AC4 power supply.
2. Plug the other end of the AC4 power cord to a 120-Vac outlet.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 10-11
montbuch10.fm

Installing Peripheral Equipment For internal distribution only

Connecting the Internal Clock Box AICB

10.2 Connecting the Internal Clock Box AICB

UCS Back
CSPCI

Ref.clk.
MCM

1) Clock cable, 90 cm

Top view of 2)Clock decoupling

stack base “T4“/2,048 MHz/120Ω
under the after G.703/10
CSPCI
AICB

1) = Sub-D clock cable, 25-pin, 90 cm S30267-Z304-A9-4

2) = “T4“ clock decoupling, 9-pin Sub-D S30267-Z7-A...
“T4” only performs clocking if connector pins 5 & 9 are bridged in the Sub-D.
(replaces the adaptor function APT3/S30807-K5407-X).

AICB S30807-U6707-X
MCM S30810-Q2313-X
CSPCI S30807-U6625-X

Notes:To install the AICB, connect all cables and slide the unit from behind into the base under
the CSPCI frame. The clock cables are fed towards the back to the CSPCI. The cable should
be stripped and make contact with the housing.
Use of the AECB is only recommended for duplex mode.
The AECB must run for two hours before initial operation. AICB functionality
can be checked using the hardware identification:
HW identification of the MTSCG (-X/-X1) C04XH/C14XH
HW identification of the MTSCG (-X/-X1) with AICBC05XH/C15XH
The clock cable S30267-Z304-A9 (90 cm) must not be extended (speak over).

Figure 10-8 Internal Clock Box AICB Connection

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
10-12 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch10.fm
For internal distribution only Installing Peripheral Equipment
Connecting the Service Terminal

10.3 Connecting the Service Terminal

V.24 interfaces Ranges for the V.24 cable:

in the shelves: 10 m at 19200 bauds
20 m at 9600 bauds
CC80F S30804-B5391-X
30 m at 4800 bauds
CCDAX S30804-B5384-X CSPCI S30807-U6625-X
90 m at 2400 bauds
HP4000 V4.0
f. f. Ger/IM f. I.M. and U.S.
D Cable:
DP.. DP.. S A = S30257-Z7752-A...
DSC. DSC. C. B = S30267-Z314-A...
X
l C = S30267-Z357-A7
D = S30267-A7269-B615
E = S30267-Z355-A25 (l=2.5 m)
1) Service zero modem cable 9-pin->9-
Dongle connector pin

1) Dongle connected directly to

D DP...
(software protection)
Dongle
C E

A/B BTT

B/E 230V∼ 230V∼

B/E
230V∼
A
B

Modem Modem

230V∼ 230V∼

Figure 10-9 Service Terminal Connection

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 10-13
montbuch10.fm

Installing Peripheral Equipment For internal distribution only

Hicom Teleservice HTS

10.4 Hicom Teleservice HTS

V.24 interfaces
in the shelves:
f. f. Ger/IM f. I.M. and U.S CCDAX S30804-B5384-X
D CC80F S30804-B5391-X
DP.. DP.. S CPCI S30122-K7659-X
DSC. DSC. C 1) Dongle connected directly to
X
l DP...
(software protection)
1) Modem
connector A = Cable, S30257-Z7752-A...
Dongle B = Cable, S30267-Z314-A...
C = Cable, S30267-Z357-A7
D = Cable, S30267-A7269-B615
D E = Cable, C39195-Z7602-A30/100

Dongle
C

A E
A

TAE6D/
UAE 8/8
a/b MDF
MODEM

230V∼
a/b a/b
SLMA

a/b
TM..

Trunk line
a/b
Service Center MODEM
+AWD Exchange
2425M DX

230V∼

Figure 10-10 Hicom Teleservice HTS

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
10-14 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch10.fm
For internal distribution only Installing Peripheral Equipment
Connecting Cables

10.5 Connecting Cables

Caution
7 The shield of all front cables (except network cables and optical fiber cables) must
be secured to the frame with two cable ties at the shelf opening. See also Section
4.4, “Shielding Connection on the Opening of the LTU Frame”.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 10-15
montbuch10.fm

Installing Peripheral Equipment For internal distribution only

Connecting Cables

10.5.1 Connecting External Devices for Teleworking

Stack 1 Stack 4
UPR/UP WAML module WAML module

10BT LTUW/ 10BT LTUW/

L80XF 10B2 L80XF
10B2
10BT 10BT

AUI AUI

1) 1)

UCD/UCS UPR/UP
LTUW/
CCDAX L80XF
CSPCI 2)

2)

Front

TRX/
FanOut Box
External HUB

1) LAN cable
- Twisted pair cable 0.7m, 10BT(RJ45m/w) C39195-Z7210-A7
2) LAN cable for external devices
- Twisted pair cable 0.7-12m, 10BT(RJ45m/m) C39195-Z7211-A7...A12

WAML module S30810-Q2205-X

LTUW shelf S30804-B5388-X/A
L80XF shelf S30804-B5389-X/A

Warning: All cables that exit the cabinet should be stripped and make contact
with the housing.
An MDF connector must NOT be connected to the WAML’s slot on the backplane.
Figure 10-11 Connecting External Units for Teleworking

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
10-16 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch10.fm
For internal distribution only Installing Peripheral Equipment
Connecting Cables

10.5.2 Connecting ISDN Connections

10.5.2.1 PNE/PBXXX Back-to-Back with Modem and DIUN2

HiPath 2 The PNE/PBXXX board connects remote HiPath

LTUW systems via the CO network. All HiPath features
X2
can still be used.
Adapter
1 2X15-pin
DIUS2 APPCU
X3

3 2 6
X2 S2
15-pin Port D Adapter
APPCU 2X15-pin
PNE
Port C X3
Port B PBXXX

Port A
# Port M MDF
11
15-pin Port 0 NT/CO network -
DIUN2 ISDN
Port 1
8
15-pin
CO network -
IDN
7
5 2 wi.
10 9
25-pin
Signalling
(max. 4 modems) Modem

220 V∼
1 = S2 DIUS2 (Dig. Interf. Unit): S30810-Q2096-X
# = Maintenance port M, V.24,
2 = APPCU adapter: S30807-K5415-X
3 = PNE private network emulator: S30810-Q6400-X or 15-pin cannon connector
PBXXX peripheral board: S30810-Q6401-X
5 = Modem e.g. CPV, V.32bis: S30122-X5621-X
6 = S2 cable, 2X15-pin cannon conn.: S30267-Z88-A10
7 = V.24 cable, 15/25-pin cannon conn.,10m: C39195-Z7267-C2
8 = S2 cable, 15-pin cannon conn., open end: S30267-Z167-A..
9 = S-Y(St)Y 16x2x0.4 cable
10 = UAE 8/8 AP: L30460-X 951-X,
UP: L30460-X 952-X,
AP/UP: L30460-X 958-X
TAE6D: C39334-Z7052-C11
11 = DIUN2 (Dig. Interf. Unit, nx64 Kbps): S30810-Q2196-X

Figure 10-12 PNE/PBXXX Back-to-Back with Modem and DIUN2

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 10-17
montbuch10.fm

Installing Peripheral Equipment For internal distribution only

Connecting Cables

10.5.2.2 PNE/PBXXX Back-to-Back with Modem and DIUN2

The PNE/PBXXX module connects remote HiPath systems by

means of the mail network and allows all HiPath features to be
used.
HiPath
2
LTUW
X2
Adapter
1 2X15-pin
DIUS2 APPCU
X3

3 2 6
X2 S2
Port D Adapter
APPCU 2X15-pin
PNE
Port C X3
Port B PBXXX

Port A
# Port M MDF
11
15-pin Port 0 NT/mail network-
ISDN
DIUN2
Port 1
8
15-pin

# = Maintenance port M, V.24, 15-pin cannon connector

1 = S2 DIUS2 (Dig. Interf. Unit): S30810-Q2096-X

2 = APPCU adapter: S30807-K5415-X
3 = PNE private network emulator: S30810-Q6400-X or
PBXXX peripheral board: S30810-Q6401-X
6 = S2 cable, 2X15-pin cannon connector: S30267-Z88-A10
8 = S2 cable, 15-pin cannon conn., open end: S30267-Z167-A..
11 = DIUN2 DIUN2 (Dig. Interf. Unit, nx64 Kbps):S30810-Q2196-X

Figure 10-13 PNE/PBXXX Back to Back without Modem and with DIUN2

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
10-18 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch10.fm
For internal distribution only Installing Peripheral Equipment
Connecting Cables

10.5.2.3 PNE/PBXXX Back-to-Back in Single-Card Box with DIUN2

HiPath Single Card BOX 11

LTUW 1 2 MDF
X2 8 X3 Port M #)
Adapter
APPCU CPAPX PNE / Port D
DIUS2 2X15-pin S2 8 15-pin PBXXX 15-pin
X3 Port C

X6 Port B
Back
13 8 Port A

Port 0 12
3
2X15-pin 8 S2
DIUN2
Port 1 NT/ ISDN mail

Front

25-pin
Modem

10 9 Mail net.-IDN
5 220 V∼
7 PSU
-48 V =
0.5 A

Signalling (max.4 modems)

#) = Maintenance port M, V.24, 15-pin cannon conn.

1 = S2 DIUS2 (Dig. Interf. Unit): S30810-Q2096-X

2 = APPCU adapter: S30807-K5415-X
3 = PNE private network emulator: S30810-Q6400-X or
PBXXX peripheral board: S30810-Q6401-X
5 = Modem e.g. CPV, V.32bis: S30122-X5621-X
7 = V.24 cable, 15/25-pin cannon conn.,10m: C39195-Z7267-C2
8 = S2 cable, 15-pin cannon conn., open end: S30267-Z167-A..
9 = S-Y(St)Y 16x2x0.4 cable
10 = UAE 8/8 AP: L30460-X 951-X,
UP: L30460-X 952-X,
AP/UP: L30460-X 958-X
TAE6D: C39334-Z7052-C11
11 = Single card BOX for PNE: S30805-U5265-X
12 = DC - DC converter CPAPX: S30807-Q5401-X100
13= DIUN2 (Dig. Interf. Unit, nx64 Kbps): S30810-Q2196-X

Figure 10-14 PNE/PBXXX Back-to-Back in Single-Card Box with DIUN2

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 10-19
montbuch10.fm

Installing Peripheral Equipment For internal distribution only

Connecting Cables

10.5.2.4 PNE/PBXXX Back to Back with Modem in DIUS2 Emulation with DIUN2

HiPath

LTUW The PNE/PBXXX module connects remote HiPath systems by means

of the mail network and allows all HiPath features to be used.
3
Port D
15-pin
Port C
PNE /
Port B PBXXX
Port A MDF

# Port M NT/ ISDN mail network

Port 0

2X15-pin DIUN2 8

Port 1

1
Mail network - IDN

5 10 9 2 wi.
7 25-pin
Signalling Modem
(max. 4 modems)

220 V∼
# = Maintenance port M, V.24, 15-pin cannon connector

1 = DIUN2 (Dig. Interf. Unit, nx64 Kbps): S30810-Q2196-X

3 = PNE private network emulator: S30810-Q6400-X or
PBXXX peripheral board: S30810-Q6401-X
5 = Modem e.g. CPV, V.32bis: S30122-X5621-X
7 = V.24 cable, 15/25-pin cannon conn.,10m:C39195-Z7267-C2
8 = S2 cable, 15-pin cannon conn., open end:S30267-Z167-A..
9 = S-Y(St)Y 16x2x0.4 cable
10 = UAE 8/8 AP: L30460-X 951-X,
UP: L30460-X 952-X,
AP/UP: L30460-X 958-X
TAE6D: C39334-Z7052-C11

Figure 10-15 PNE/PBXXX Back to Back with Modem in DIUS2 Emulation with DIUN2

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
10-20 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch10.fm
For internal distribution only Installing Peripheral Equipment
Connecting Cables

10.5.2.5 CDG/PBXXX as Gateway, Fully Integrated Mode

LTUW HiPath
MDF

3 2 NT/ ISDN mail network

X2
Adapter
CDG /
APPCU 2X15-pin S2
8
PBXXX APQC X3

Fully integrated mode is used as of Hicom E V3.0

2 = APPCU adapter: S30807-K5415-X or

APQC adapter: S30807-K6124-X
3 = CorNet DPNSS gateway CDG: S30810-Q2218-X or
PBXXX peripheral board: S30810-Q6401-X
8 = S2 cable, 15-pin cannon conn., open end: S30267-Z167-A..
Figure 10-16 CDG/PBXXX as Gateway, Fully Integrated Mode

10.5.2.6 CDG/PBXXX with DIUN2 as Gateway, Partially Integrated Mode

HiPath MDF
2 NT/ ISDN mail
LTUW
X2 S2 network
8
Adapter
3 CDG 2X15-pin
PBXXX APPCU
X3

1
6
Port 0
2X15-pin DIUN2 Partially integrated mode is used for < Hi-
com 300 E V3.0
Port 1
S2
1 = DIUN2 (Dig. Interf. Unit, nx64 Kbps): S30810-Q2196-X
2 = APPCU adapter: S30807-K5415-X
3 = CorNet DPNSS gateway CDG: S30810-Q2218-X or
PBXXX peripheral board: S30810-Q6401-X
6 = S2 cable, 2X15-pin cannon conn.: S30267-Z88-A10
8 = S2 cable, 15-pin cannon conn., open end: S30267-Z167-A..
Figure 10-17 CDG/PBXXX with DIUN2 as Gateway, Partially Integrated Mode

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 10-21
montbuch10.fm

Installing Peripheral Equipment For internal distribution only

Connecting Cables

10.5.3 Cordless Multicell Integration

>
The Cordless Multicell Integration (CMI) is not released in Canada and U.S.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
10-22 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch10.fm
For internal distribution only Installing Peripheral Equipment
Connecting Cables

SWU 220 V∼
PSP
MDF
LTU.., A Refer to next 2
L80X KAST UP0/E page for details
1
SLC16
(U2B1Q) BS 2
4 3
≥33 V =

200 mA

EPSU B
-56 V = Line damping for UP0/E: max.14.5 dB with 192 kHz
5 U2B1Q: max.8000 m DECT
UP0/E interface: If the radio zones of two base stations overlap, radio channel
then the difference in the cable lengths of the associated base
stations must be restricted to 500 m (transfer time for handover
process).
U2B1Q interface: The transfer time is automatically corrected
An SLC16 uses up to 64 ports on the backplane.
The CMI application is always restricted to one shelf. This
means:
SLCs are inserted either in the base cabinet or in the expansion up to 8 simultaneous calls
shelf. with 2 x UP0/E on base station S30807-
A= Universal connecting unit H5471-X200.
UAE 8/8 AP: L30460-X 951-X,
UP: -X 952-X, or max. 12 simultaneous calls with 3 x
AP/UP: -X 958-X UP0/E on base station S30807-H5471-
X.
B= Base station for CMI, Version 2.1, (UP0/E)
S30807-H5471-X / -X200 or or max. 8 simultaneous calls with 2 x
base station for CMI, Version 2.2, (U2B1Q) U2B1Q on base station S30807-H5473-
S30807-H5473-X X.
C= Standard mobile phone (SMT) but 127 mobile phones per SLC16
S30852-H911-B101/-B104 (anthracite/white) or C
enhanced mobile phone (KMT) supported.
S30852-H910-B501/-B504 (anthracite/white)
each with charging unit:
S30852-S910-B211/-B214 (anthracite/white)
1 = MDF cable 16x2x0.4
UP0/E interface: The UP0/E
interfaces of a base station must be connected with one SLC16/S30810-Q2151-X.
2 = Plug-in power supply for local power feed
PSP1: S30122-K5061-X-2
3 = Edge connector, 8-pin C39334-Z7089-C13 (contained in BS2)
4 = Terminal block (for local power feed only)
5 = External power supply unit (EPSU). Required if only one port is used by BS2
and the length of the line to the Hicom system is ≥ 100 m.

Figure 10-18 Cordless Multicell Integration, I.M.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 10-23
montbuch10.fm

Installing Peripheral Equipment For internal distribution only

Connecting Cables

10.5.3.1 CMI (V2.1/UP0/E) Network Local Supply Connections

UAE 8/8
+

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PSP1 plug-in power supply

230 V ~
48 V =
-

Edge CMI base station

connector
Terminal block Connector X1
6 7 8 Free

8
b3, port 2 or -

4 5 6 7
a3, port 2 or +
-
4 5

b2, port 1
a2, port 1
2 3

b1, port 0
2 3

+
a1, port 0
max 3x UP0/E
1

Free
1

CMI V2.1
From Hicom system

The local power feed should be used if:

only one port is in use, and the length of the line to the Hicom
system is ≥ 100 m.
The power supply of a base station must be protected by approx. 300 mA (15W)
(fire protection).

If several base stations are supplied by means of a power supply, then every base station
must be individually protected with approx. 200 mA (10W).

PSP1 = Plug-in power supply S30122-K5061-X for local power feed

UAE 8/8 = Universal connection unit
AP: L30460-X 951-X,
UP: -X 952-X,
AP/UP: -X 958-X
CMI = CMI base station S30807-H5471-X/-X100/-X200 (UP0/E)
Edge conn. = Edge connector C39334-Z7089-C13 is supplied

Figure 10-19 CMI Network Local Supply Conditions

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
10-24 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch10.fm
For internal distribution only Installing Peripheral Equipment
Installing the Breakout Box

10.6 Installing the Breakout Box

The cable supplied with the breakout box is 1 meter (3 ft.) long. If the breakout box is installed
more that 1 meter (3 ft.) from the HiPath 4000, an additional standard 25-pair extension cable
with Amphenol connectors can be installed between the breakout box cable and the breakout
box.
Because the breakout box cable is unbalanced, any additional length added to the HiPath 4000
side of the breakout box must be subtracted from the distance on the peripheral device side of
the breakout box. The total distance of the EIA/TIA-232-E cabling from the peripheral device to
the HiPath 4000 must not exceed a total distance of 15.24 m (50 ft.) without the addition of
line drivers.
If the peripheral device is not located near the HiPath 4000, refer to the Siemens HiPath 4000
Customer Site Planning Guide and AC and DC Systems Power and Grounding Specifications,
G281- 0725-00 for detailed power and grounding information.
Install the breakout box (Figure 10-20) as follows:
1. Attach the ground wire to the ground lug on the right side of the breakout box.
2. Attach the other end of the ground wire to the system supplemental ground.

This step is not necessary for new breakout boxes.

>
3. For the wall-mounted breakout box, install the wall-mounting bracket on the wall.
4. Position the breakout box onto the wall-mount bracket or rack as applicable.
5. Install the mounting screws on the left and right ends of the breakout box faceplate.
6. Attach the cables to the breakout box as follows:
a) Attach the breakout box cable SIVAPAC connector to the appropriate card slot loca-
tion at the backplane.
b) Attach the breakout box cable Amphenol connector to the breakout box J1 connector.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 10-25
montbuch10.fm

Installing Peripheral Equipment For internal distribution only

Installing the Breakout Box

Wall-mounting bracket

Rack-mountable
faceplate

J1

P1

P2

P3
Grounding lug

P4

40000154ger

Figure 10-20 Breakout box

Breakout box adapter Breakout box

X X
PB T B O
U
-O
AE K
BR

PBX side

40000155ger

Figure 10-21 Breakout box

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
10-26 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch10.fm
For internal distribution only Installing Peripheral Equipment
Installing the Distance Adapter

10.7 Installing the Distance Adapter

For additional information, refer to the installation instructions that are shipped with
> the product.

The distance adapter converts the 2-wire U2B1Q interface of the subscriber line module 2B1Q
3 (SLMQ3) board to the UP0/E interface of the Optiset E or OptiPoint telephone.
To install the distance adapter:
1. At the back of the distance adapter, connect one end of a line cord to the UP0/E connector.
2. Connect the other end of the line cord to the Optiset E or OptiPoint telephone.
3. At the back of the distance adapter, connect another line cord to the PABX U2B/1Q connec-
tor.
4. Connect the other end of the line cord to the MDF.
5. Plug the power supply into an ac outlet
6. At the back of the distance adapter, connect the other end of the power supply into the PS
connector.
Figure 10-22 shows the connectivity options for the distance adapters.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 10-27
montbuch10.fm

Installing Peripheral Equipment For internal distribution only

Installing the Distance Adapter

HiPath4000
4500
2
4
3
U 2B1Q 1

U P0/E
7
SLMQ3
(16 ports) 7 3 4
2

1
U 2B1Q U P0/E
6 5

EIA/TIA-232

40000152ger

1 - Distance adapter
2 - Optiset E (primary)
3 - Analog adapter
4 - Analog device
5 - EIA/TIA-232-E data device
6 - Data adapter
7 - 6000 meters

Figure 10-22 Connectivity Options for the Distance Adapters

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
10-28 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch10.fm
For internal distribution only Installing Peripheral Equipment
Installing the Distance Adapter

Front View

SIEMENS

Multiport (back view)

To Optiset E telephone To SLMQ3

PABX PABX PABX PABX

UP0/E U2B/1Q UP0/E U2B/1Q UP0/E U2B/1Q UP0/E U2B/1Q PS

Power Supply

Single port (back view)

PABX
UP0/E U2B/1Q PS

40000153

Figure 10-23 Distance Adapter

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 10-29
montbuch10.fm

Installing Peripheral Equipment For internal distribution only

Installing and Configuring the HiPath ProCenter Server Message Stream

10.8 Installing and Configuring the HiPath ProCenter Server Message

Stream
The HiPath ProCenter server message stream (formerly called message board) is used by Hi-
Path ProCenter server supervisors to display information in the HiPath ProCenter server agent
work area or anywhere within 3 m (1000 ft.) of the HiPath 4000. Please refer to http://www-
dev.eng.sc.rolm.com/pid/enduser/callcntr/procentr/5074_0.pdf for additional information about
this software solution.

10.9 Installing the Music-on-Hold Interface Box

The music-on-hold interface box connects a customer-supplied music source to the system. It
prevents the music volume from increasing to levels that could impair the caller’s hearing.
Install the music-on-hold interface box according to the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

10.10 Installing the Optiset E Adapter Modules

Refer to the Optiset E Entry, Basic, Standard, Advance, and Advance Plus Administrator Guide
for installation instructions for the Optiset E adapter modules.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
10-30 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch12.fm
For internal distribution only Installing the IPDA
Overview

11 Installing the IPDA

This chapter describes the connection of the HiPath 4000 to the (IP Distributed Architecture)
IPDA system. It also provides procedures to install the HiPath IPDA components. Refer to the
HiPath 4000 V2.0 Service Manual for additional information about the IPDA.

Additional information on IPDA installations are provided in the HiPath 4000 V4.0
> Service Manual (IP solutions).

11.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11.2 IPDA Connection Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.2.1 Connecting to AP 3700-9 IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.2.2 Connecting to LTUW/L80XF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

11.1 Overview
Figure 11-1 on page 11-2 shows a diagram of the HiPath 4000/IPDA connectivity. The systems
can be installed as free-standing systems or can be built into a 19-inch cabinet.
HiPath 4300 supports up to 40 access points connected over IP (AP 3300 IP or AP 3700-9 IP)
as well as up to 3 shelves that are connected directly (AP3300/AP3700-9 IP).
HiPath 4000 facilitates the distribution of access points over an IP network. These access
points are shelves (AP3300 IP or AP3700-9 IP) that accommodate standard HiPath 4000 inter-
face modules. The stations at the access points are treated in exactly the same way as if they
were directly connected to a HiPath 4000 system as before. All IP-distributed components are
administered as a single system over one HiPath 4000 system connection point.
The system consists of up to four stacks (AP 3300 IP only) and one power management unit,
which are connected to each other in sequence. The system can be placed anywhere in the
room (maximum expansion of 15 LTUW = 5760 ports). Each stack can be configured with up
to 4 boxes. The stacks are permanently connected. A maximum of 6 wall main distribution
frames (MDFHX6) can be used. This corresponds to expansion up to a maximum 2304 ports.
Cabling should only be configured underfloor (double floor). The reference point for system ca-
bling is located at the lower end of the stack (see Figure 5-7 on page 5-8).
The system can also be configured using IPDA instead of one single stack (maximum of four
boxes for every stack). These systems can be installed as free-standing systems or can be built
into a 19-inch cabinet.
HiPath 4500 supports up to 83 IP-connected access points (AP 3300 IP or AP 3700/9 IP) in
addition to up to 15 directly connected module frames (AP 3300).

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 11-1
montbuch12.fm

Installing the IPDA For internal distribution only

IPDA Connection Variants

HiPath 4000 also facilitates the distribution of access points over an IP network. These access
points are frames (AP 3300 IP or AP 3700/9 IP) that include standard HiPath 4000 interface
modules. User connection to access points is identical to standard, direct connection to a Hi-
Path 4000 system. Administration of all IP-distributed components is carried out as a single
system using a HiPath 4000 system connection point.

HG Peripheral
HG modules
3570 3575
AP 3300 IP
HG
3570
HiPath 4000 LAN Segment

IP network
Peripheral
modules

HG Peripheral
modules
3575
Public AP 3700-9IP
Control
network
Public
HiPath 4000 network

Figure 11-1 System Architecture Overview

Each cabinet, including the front cover, forms a shielded unit. Ensure to lock the cab-
> inets while the system is running and replace the covers immediately following test-
ing and maintenance.

11.2 IPDA Connection Variants

11.2.1 Connecting to AP 3700-9 IP

This section describes possible connections for IPDA system installations: HiPath 4000 V4.0
permits you to use both existing AP 3300 cabinets (L80XF) and the new AP 3700 IP cabinets
(AP 3700-9 IP) as IPDA frames (see Figure 11-2 on page 11-3).

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
11-2 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch12.fm
For internal distribution only Installing the IPDA
IPDA Connection Variants

HiPath 4000
AP 3700-9 IP (9 slots)

HG3575
AP 3700-9 N
*-G5412-X C
AP 3700-9 N U
*-G5412-X C I
2
U
I LUNA LUNA LUNA
IP 4 2 2 2
HiPath 4000
AP3700-9 (9 slots) with network LUNA LUNA LUNA
CSAPE, Survivability 2 2 2
Server

AP 3700-9 N
*-G5412-X C HiPath 4000
U AP 3300 IP
I
4
UP N HG3575
L80XF C
LUNA LUNA LUNA U
2 2 2 I

Router

Figure 11-2 IPDA connection to AP 3700-9

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 11-3
montbuch12.fm

Installing the IPDA For internal distribution only

IPDA Connection Variants

11.2.2 Connecting to LTUW/L80XF

HiPath
HiPath 4000 -AP 3700-9 IP
HG3570
Stack 1 STMI4 AP 3700-9 N
UPR/ C
UP l U
T I
LTUW/ U
1) 4
L80XF C IP LUNA LUNA LUNA
X network 2) 2 2 2

LTUW/ l 2)
L80XF T
U
C Router
X

LTUW/ l HG3570
L80XF T STMI4
1)
U
C
X 2)
-AP 3300 IP
UCS
UP HG3575
CSPCI L80XF NCUI4
CS-CPCI
1)

Router

2)

Figure 11-3 Connecting AP 3300 IP and AP 3700-9 to LTUW/L80XF

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
11-4 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch13.fm
For internal distribution only Starting the System
Completing the Installation

12 Starting the System

This chapter describes the commissioning and startup of the HiPath 4000 system.

12.1 Completing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

12.2 Pre-Power On Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
12.2.1 Reseating the Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
12.2.2 Checking the Signal Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
12.2.3 Checking the Power Distribution Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.3 Turning On a Nonredundant AC-Powered HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.4 Turning On Cabinet 1 and 2 of a Redundant AC-Powered HiPath 4000. . . . . . . . . . 12-4
12.5 Turning On Cabinet 3 and 4 of a Redundant AC-Powered HiPath 4000. . . . . . . . . . 12-5
12.6 Turning On Cabinet 1 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.7 Turning On Cabinet 2 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
12.8 Turning On Cabinet 3 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
12.9 Turning On Cabinet 4 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
12.10 Installing PROCOMM PLUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
12.11 Activating the Clock Battery on the DSCXL Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
12.12 Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
12.13 Installing the Customer Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
12.13.1 Factory-Generated Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
12.13.2 Site-Generated Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
12.14 Starting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
12.15 Connecting to the TAP, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
12.16 Replacing the Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17

12.1 Completing the Installation

Once you have completed the installation process, double-check the items in Table 12-1.

Check Completed?
1. Screw connections secure?
2. Grounding system connected correctly (system/MDF)?
See Chapter 6, "Grounding the HiPath 4000", on page 6-1.
3. Mains connection protected by fuses?
4. Power supply connected correctly (internal/external)?
Chapter 7, “Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply”.
Table 12-1 Post Installation Checklist

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 12-1
montbuch13.fm

Starting the System For internal distribution only

Pre-Power On Checks

Check Completed?
5. Cable connectors secure?
See Section 12.2.2, “Checking the Signal Cable Connections”.
6. Cables laid correctly (with cable grips)?
Refer to Chapter 8, “Internal Line Cables” and Chapter 9, “External Ca-
bling Assemblies”.
7. MDF layout plan completed?
8. Covers replaced correctly (necessary only if the system is not started im-
mediately after installation)?
See Section 12.16, “Replacing the Covers”.
9. Documentation assembled and handed over to the customer?
Table 12-1 Post Installation Checklist

12.2 Pre-Power On Checks

Perform the following procedures before you apply power to the system.

12.2.1 Reseating the Boards

Do not use ESD procedures when working with power supplies.

> If any power supplies becomes unseated during transport, reseat it by gently push-
ing it toward the backplane until it seats in place.
If any board becomes unseated during transport, reseat it as follows:
1. Follow the electrostatic discharge prevention procedures.
2. Insert the peg of the board removal tool into the hole at the top of the unseated board .

3. Lift the board removal tool and completely unseat the board.
4. Remove the board removal tool.
5. Gently push the board toward the backplane until it seats in the backplane connector.

12.2.2 Checking the Signal Cable Connections

LTU shelf signal cables are signal cables that originate at the LTU shelf backplane.
To ensure that all signal cable connections are secure:

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
12-2 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch13.fm
For internal distribution only Starting the System
Turning On a Nonredundant AC-Powered HiPath 4000

1. Check that all signal cables are tightly secured at the connector on each shelf backplane.
2. Check that the connectors on the other end of the signal cables are tightly secured.
3. If signal cables were disconnected during transit, refer to the hardware map to connect and
secure these cables to the proper locations.

12.2.3 Checking the Power Distribution Cable Connections

The system is shipped with the power distribution cables already connected to the backplane.
These cables may become disconnected during transit. To check that the power distribution ca-
ble connections in each cabinet:
1. Check for loose or disconnected power distribution cable connections at the backplanes.
2. If there are any loose or disconnected power distribution cable connections, refer to the
hardware map to connect and secure these cables to the proper locations.

12.3 Turning On a Nonredundant AC-Powered HiPath 4000

To turn on a nonredundant ac-powered HiPath 4000:
1. Remove the tie-wrap from the power cord and uncoil.
2. Plug the ac power cord to the wall outlet.
3. Plug the other end of the ac power cord to the LPC80.
4. Turn on the power switch on the LPC80.
5. Turn on the power switch on the PSUP.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 12-3
montbuch13.fm

Starting the System For internal distribution only

Turning On Cabinet 1 and 2 of a Redundant AC-Powered HiPath 4000

12.4 Turning On Cabinet 1 and 2 of a Redundant AC-Powered HiPath

4000

WARNING
1 Observe all applicable safety precautions when working with high voltages.
To turn on cabinet 1 of an ac-powered HiPath 4000:
1. Plug in the HiPath 4000 power cord to the wall outlet.
2. At the back of the cabinet: Turn on the main circuit breaker under the CSPCI shelf (see Fig-
ure 12-2 on page 12-7).
3. At the ACDPX board in UACD stack 1: Turn on the ac input power switches.
4. At the PDPX2 terminal field in UACD stack 1: Turn on the ac output power module (PM1,
PM2, and PM3) circuit breakers.
5. At the PDPX2 terminal field in UACD stack 1: Turn on the circuit breakers for the
–48-V trunks (BULK and TALK).
6. At the back of UACD stack 1: Turn on the backup battery circuit breaker.

ECCB is not used in the U.S.

>
7. Turn on the dc-to-dc shelf power supplies in the following order:
a) Shelf 1
b) Remaining dc-to-dc shelf power supplies
8. At the PDPX2 terminal field in UACD stack 1: Turn on the power share circuit breaker.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
12-4 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch13.fm
For internal distribution only Starting the System
Turning On Cabinet 3 and 4 of a Redundant AC-Powered HiPath 4000

12.5 Turning On Cabinet 3 and 4 of a Redundant AC-Powered HiPath

4000

WARNING
1 Observe all applicable safety precautions when working with high voltages.
To turn on cabinet 3 of an ac-powered HiPath 4000:
1. Plug in the HiPath 4000 power cord to the wall outlet.
2. At the back of the cabinet: Turn on the main circuit breaker under the CSPCI shelf (see Fig-
ure 12-2 on page 12-7).
3. At the ACDPX board in UACD stack 2: Turn on the ac input power switches.
4. At the PDPX2 terminal field in UACD stack 2: Turn on the ac output power module (PM1,
PM2, and PM3) circuit breakers.
5. At the PDPX2 terminal field in UACD stack 1: Turn on the –48-V circuit breakers (BULK
and TALK).
6. At the back of UACD stack 2: Turn on the backup battery circuit breaker.

ECCB is not used in the U.S.

>
7. Turn on the dc-to-dc shelf power supplies in the following order:
a) Shelf 1
b) Remaining dc-to-dc shelf power supplies
8. At the PDPX2 terminal field in UACD stack 2: Turn on the power share circuit breaker.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 12-5
montbuch13.fm

Starting the System For internal distribution only

Turning On Cabinet 1 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000

12.6 Turning On Cabinet 1 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000

WARNING
1 Observe all applicable safety precautions when working with high voltages.
To turn on cabinet 1 of a dc-powered HiPath 4000:
1. At the dc system switchboard: Turn on and tag off the circuit breaker for the dc electric cir-
cuit in cabinet 1.
2. At the back of cabinet 1 (under the CSPCI shelf): Turn on the main circuit breaker (see Fig-
ure 12-2 on page 12-7).
3. At the ICBP field in the UDCD cabinet in stack 1: Turn on the PMOD power switches (see
Figure 12-1 on page 12-6).
4. Turn on the cabinet 1 dc-to-dc shelf power supplies in the following order:
a) Shelf 1 (CSPCI shelf, cabinet 1)
b) Remaining dc-to-dc shelf modules
5. At the front of UDCD cabinet 1 stack 1 ODP (Figure 12-3): Turn on the
–48 V TALK circuit breaker.

Figure 12-1 ICBP

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
12-6 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch13.fm
For internal distribution only Starting the System
Turning On Cabinet 1 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000

+48 V

–48 V

Ground wire
Main circuit To base unit assembly
breaker

Figure 12-2 Main Circuit Breaker, HiPath 4000, Rear View

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 12-7
montbuch13.fm

Starting the System For internal distribution only

Turning On Cabinet 2 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000

12.7 Turning On Cabinet 2 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000

To turn on cabinet 2 of a dc-powered HiPath 4000:
1. At the dc system switchboard: Turn off and tag off the circuit breaker for cabinet 2.
2. At the back of cabinet 2 (under the CSPCI shelf): Turn on the main circuit breaker (see Fig-
ure 12-2 on page 12-7).
3. At the ICBP field in UDCD cabinet 1 in stack 2: Turn on the PMOD power switches (see
Figure 12-1 on page 12-6).
4. At the front of UDCD cabinet 1 stack 2 ODP: Turn on the -48-V BULK circuit breaker (see
Figure 12-3 on page 12-8).

Figure 12-3 Output Distribution Panel, Front View

In cabinet 2 in the HiPath 4000 system: Turn on the dc-to-dc shelf power supplies in the follow-
ing order:
a) Shelf 1, (CSPCI shelf, cabinet 2)
b) Remaining dc-to-dc shelf power supplies
5. At the front of UDCD cabinet 1 stack 2 ODP: Turn on the -48-V TALK circuit breaker (see
Figure 12-3 on page 12-8).

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
12-8 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch13.fm
For internal distribution only Starting the System
Turning On Cabinet 3 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000

12.8 Turning On Cabinet 3 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000

To turn on cabinet 3 of a dc-powered HiPath 4000:
1. At the dc system switchboard: Turn off and tag off the circuit breaker for cabinet 3.
2. At the back of cabinet 3 (under the CSPCI shelf): Turn on the main circuit breaker.
3. At the ICBP field in UDCD cabinet 2 in stack 1: Turn on the PMOD power switches.
4. In cabinet 3 in the HiPath 4000 system: Turn on the dc-to-dc shelf power supplies in the
following order:
a) Shelf 1 (CSPCI shelf, cabinet 1)
b) Remaining dc-to-dc shelf power supplies
5. At the front of UDCD cabinet 2 stack 1 ODP: Turn on the -48-V TALK circuit breaker.

12.9 Turning On Cabinet 4 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000

To turn on cabinet 4 of a dc-powered HiPath 4000:
1. At the dc system switchboard: Turn off and tag off the circuit breaker for cabinet 4.
2. At the back of cabinet 4 (under the CSPCI shelf): Turn on the main circuit breaker.
3. At the ICBP field in UDCD cabinet 2 in stack 2: Turn on the PMOD power switches.
4. At the front of UDCD cabinet 2 stack 2 ODP: Turn on the -48-V BULK circuit breaker.
5. In cabinet 4 in the HiPath 4000 system: Turn on the dc-to-dc shelf power supplies in the
following order:
a) Shelf 1, (CSPCI shelf, cabinet 1)
b) Remaining dc-to-dc shelf power supplies
6. At the front of UDCD cabinet 2 stack 2 ODP: Turn on the –48-V TALK circuit breaker (see
Figure 12-3 on page 12-8).

12.10 Installing PROCOMM PLUS

This procedure supplements, does not replace, the installation instructions that are
> shipped with the PROCOMM PLUS package.

To install PROCOMM PLUS onto the C drive of your laptop by first using the installation instruc-
tions that are shipped with the PROCOMM PLUS package and then perform the following pro-
cedure.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 12-9
montbuch13.fm

Starting the System For internal distribution only

Activating the Clock Battery on the DSCXL Board

1. Insert the Siemens PCPLUS keymap diskette into drive A.

2. At the DOS prompt, type
copy a:\pcplus.kbd c:\pcplus
and press enter.

12.11 Activating the Clock Battery on the DSCXL Board

The battery backup ensures that the power supply to the system clock is retained in the event
of a power failure, guaranteeing accurate timing for up to 48 hours.

Warning: Static Sensitive Devices

4 Observe all precautions for prevention of electrostatic discharge (ESD). Failure to
follow ESD prevention procedures can result in permanent or intermittent board fail-
ures.
The clock battery is located on the DSCXL boards. The battery is no longer activated by jumper
settings but by the software.

Figure 12-4 Battery on the DSCXL board

12.12 Setting the Date and Time

The system time is needed for all central messages and is output to all digital terminals. Set the
current date and time using the AMO DATE.

Expect a time delay until the digital terminals have accepted the change (time/date).
> The change (time/date) is only implemented on the attendant console when you re-
move and then reinsert the handset cord.
If the lithium battery on the DSCXL board is fully charged, the clock continues to function for up
to 48 hours after a power failure.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
12-10 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch13.fm
For internal distribution only Starting the System
Installing the Customer Database

12.13 Installing the Customer Database

To install the customer HD, use either the:
● Complete customer database from the HD or
● Generate the customer database on-site
The database is generated in two ways:
– Factory-generated hard disk
– Site-generated database

12.13.1 Factory-Generated Database

In this scenario, the factory generates the customer database onto the hard disk and ships it
with the system. The service technician can start up the system immediately after it is installed.
Figure 12-5 shows a flowchart of a system startup from the hard disk.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 12-11
montbuch13.fm

Starting the System For internal distribution only

Installing the Customer Database

Activate the system clock (connect battery)

Insert the HW dongle

The password is part of the
customer database
Switch on power

Check power modules

(LEDs)

Create empty database

with AMO DBC
The system is supplied
with a complete customer Insert MO containing
Create customer database HD. complete customer DB
with TAG and copy to HD

Generate system with TAP

(copy ACF to HD or MO)

Boot the system

Check ports, network access and

server connections.

Customer data backup

1. MO stored ext. by customer
2. MO in drive for backup

Figure 12-5 Startup Flowchart

12.13.2 Site-Generated Database

In this scenario, the system is only supplied with a test database. The service technician must
create the customer database before the system can be started up. This can be done on-site
or in the Customer Support Center (CSC). Figure 12-6 on page 12-13 shows a flowchart of gen-
erating the database on site.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
12-12 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch13.fm
For internal distribution only Starting the System
Installing the Customer Database

1. Procedure - Checking 2. Procedure - Creating a

As-Unpacked Quality Customer-Specific Database

Test DB (without Record KONDA (e.g. in HUGT)

parametrization
of the modules)

Enter customer data + password

(e.g. with HUGT)

Perform startup
with the test data-
base Create customer-specific database
(ACF)

Delete
test DB
ACF transfer

- HOT
- HiPath 4000
Expert Access
HiPath 4000
Customer Sys-
tem 3. Procedure - ACF Transfer
to the HiPath 4000 System

DB generation

Figure 12-6 Flowchart of an On-Site- or CSC-Generation of the Database

During HW updates, you must maintain the AMO TINFO. This AMO is used to man-
> age the technical data required for the configuration and upgrade of a system. The
AMO TINFO also has a notepad function which you can use for making additional
entries.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 12-13
montbuch13.fm

Starting the System For internal distribution only

Starting the System

12.14 Starting the System

When you start the HiPath 4000 system (PABX), use the SSDs or LEDs to identify the different
load states that are reached. These displays can help you check the PABX start up errors, if
any.

When importing systems into non-European (EU) countries, customs regulations

> stipulates that the system must not be operable when imported. To do this, connect
the SCSI-ADDRESS jumper of the HD to a value other than 0.
In countries such as AFTA countries, India or the People’s Republic of China, the
MOD must copied to the HD after delivery of the system.

Caution
7 If the system is brought into the equipment room from a cold environment, conden-
sation may occur. Wait until the system temperature is balanced and the system is
completely dry before starting it up.
To perform a startup:
1. Ensure that the plug has been ECOS-tested for safety purposes.
2. Ensure that the LPC80 and PSUPs are off.
3. Plug the LPC80 power plug into the base unit assembly (BUA) that is located underneath
the CSPCI box.
4. Turn on the LPC80 (-48V).
5. Activate all LPC80s first and then activate all PSUPs.
6. If a customer HD is not available, insert the MO disk containing the customer database in
the MO disk drive.
If a complete customer HD is available, replace the test database on the system with the
customer HD database and restart the system.
7. If the system is being started from the MO disk with the test database, initiate the startup
of the HiPath 400 by pressing the LCT key on the DSCXL board.
If the system is being started from the hard disk drive, the system starts up as soon as it
is turned on.
8. Check the progress of the startup by checking the SSD on the DSCXL board.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
12-14 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch13.fm
For internal distribution only Starting the System
Connecting to the TAP, I.M.

Operating Status Explanation

ADP is started up

SWU is started up

Table 12-2 DSCXL, 7-Segment Display

12.15 Connecting to the TAP, I.M.

In I.M., TAP is used to identify the laptop of the service technician.

>
Figure 12-7 shows the connection locations for the TAP.
1 = Power supply
2 = SCSI port
3 = V.24 port
1 2 3 4 4 = Printer port

Figure 12-7 TAP Connections

To connect to the TAP (see Figure 12-8):

1. Connect the relevant V.24 cable to the V.24 port of the TAP (in the U.S., COM1 or COM2
port).
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the V.24 port of the DSCXL board.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 12-15
montbuch13.fm

Starting the System For internal distribution only

Connecting to the TAP, I.M.

3. Connect the power cable of the TAP to an ac outlet.

SSD display

RESET
RUN/ACT
MIN/MAJ
LCT/

LAN interfaces
LED Customer

Service
IPDA

Atlantic
LAN function LEDs
Service

TAP
Modem

HTS

Figure 12-8 DSCXL board front panel

12.15.1 Checking the Ring Generator

If the ANATE telephone does not ring, check the ring generator.
>
P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
12-16 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch13.fm
For internal distribution only Starting the System
Replacing the Covers

Ensure that the ring generator is jumpered as follows before powering on the system: 85 V, 20
Hz. To check this setting:
1. Ensure that the system is off.
2. Unscrew the screw that holds the ring generator in place.
3. Remove the ring generator.
4. On the backside of the ring generator, find a black plastic flap.
5. Check the setting.
6. Refer to the diagram on the ring generator for additional information.

12.16 Replacing the Covers

Each cabinet, including the front cover, forms a shielded unit. Ensure to lock the cab-
> inets while the system is running and replace the covers immediately following test-
ing and maintenance.
Replace the individual covers when the system has been fully mounted, cabled, and put into
operation. The covers are replaced in the reverse order to the order in which they were re-
moved.
1. Replace the covers starting with the lower cabinets.
2. Lock the top cover by turning the quick-release 90° to the left or right (1) until the covers
are firmly secured.

The covers are secure when you hear a click as you shut the cover. The cover
7 may fall off if it is not locked into place.

3. Install the cover to the cable channel (see Figure 12-9 on page 12-18).

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 12-17
montbuch13.fm

Starting the System For internal distribution only

Replacing the Covers

Cable channel covers

Figure 12-9 Installing the Cable Channel Covers

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
12-18 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch14.fm
For internal distribution only Verifying the System

13 Verifying the System

This chapter describes the tests and procedures used to verify the operation of the system.

13.1 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

13.2 Checking the Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.3 Checking the Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.4 Verifying the AC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.5 Testing the Maintenance Terminal for the Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13.6 Checking and Testing the Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
13.7 Testing the Restart and Failure Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
13.8 Backing up the Customer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13.9 Setting and Activating the HTS Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13.10 Checking the Ring Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13.11 Verifying the Station-to-MDF Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13.12 Verifying Transmission Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13.12.1 Balancing Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13.12.2 Choosing the Balance Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13.12.3 Selecting the Balance Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13.12.4 Verifying ISDN Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
13.12.5 Verifying T1 Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
13.12.6 Recording Circuit IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
13.13 Verifying the MO-Disk Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
13.14 Verifying the Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
13.15 Verifying the Operation of System Features and Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
13.15.1 Testing CDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
13.15.2 Testing Least-Cost Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
13.16 Verifying the System Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
13.17 Customer Training, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 13-1
montbuch14.fm

Verifying the System For internal distribution only

Tools Required

13.1 Tools Required

Each cabinet, including the front cover, forms a shielded unit. Ensure to lock the cab-
> inets while the system is running and replace the covers immediately following test-
ing and maintenance.
Use the following tools to perform the system verification procedures in this chapter:
● Maintenance telephone with a direct inward dialing (DID) number and direct trunk select
capability enabled
● Telephone test set, P/N 66E3472 or 66E3924
● Transmission measuring test set (TMS) with singing return loss (SRL) and echo return loss
(ERL) capability (SAGE 930A with options 01 and 10C), P/N 66E4280

Perform the installation and testing procedures using the Hicom One Tool (HOT) or
> "HiPath 4000 Expert Access" (for a more detailed description of these procedures
refer to the Online Help for the Hicom One Tool).

13.2 Checking the Boards

To check the status of the peripheral boards, use the selected software (such as HiPath 4000
Expert Access, in Europe). Peripheral boards are used in the line termination unit (such as
SLMA2, TMAU, RG, and LTUCA boards).

13.3 Checking the Cables

Check the assignment of the generated subscriber positions to the extensions. Test the func-
tionality of trunk lines, tie lines, and special equipment.
1. Set up a tie-line (incoming/outgoing) and then initiate a consultation call.
Forward the call.
2. Set up a trunk (incoming/outgoing) and then initiate a consultation call.
Forward the call.
3. Check the line statuses using the TAP (analog circuits, digital circuits and special circuits):
4. Ensure that the connected lines are in the READY state.

13.4 Verifying the AC4

To verify the AC4 terminal:

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
13-2 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch14.fm
For internal distribution only Verifying the System
Verifying the AC4

1. Unplug the handset jack and press the Check Memory key. The test mode screen ap-
pears (see Figure 13-1).
TEST MODE
1 LED TEST
2 KEYBOARD TEST
3 INTERNAL TEST RESULTS
4 FIRMWARE AND HARDWARE ISSUES
5 GENERAL
6 TEST PATTERN 1 (RASTER 1)
7 TEST PATTERN 2 (RASTER 2)
8 TEST PATTERN 3 (CHARACTER SET)
9 SYSTEM MESSAGE TRACER
* AUDIBLE ALER ON/OFF # PITCH ADJUST
0 EXIT TEST MODE

Figure 13-1 Test Mode Screen

2. Press 1 LED TEST to test the LEDs. The LEDs light up simultaneously for a brief period,
then turn off. Each LED then lights up, sequentially progressing from left to right, starting
from the top row to the bottom of the keyboard.
When the LED test is finished, the TEST MODE menu appears.
3. Press 2 KEYBOARD TEST to test the keyboard,.
4. Press 3 INTERNAL TEST RESULTS to display the hardware errors when the components
of the AC4 are test.
5. Press 4 FIRMWARE AND HARDWARE ISSUES to display the hardware and firmware
identification, version number, and revision level of the AC4
6. Press 5 GENERAL to perform the GENERAL test as follows:.

5 GENERAL test mode is unique (see Figure 13-2 on page 13-4).

>

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 13-3
montbuch14.fm

Verifying the System For internal distribution only

Verifying the AC4

a) Plug the jack into the keyboard receptacle to set the AC4 into standby mode.
GENERAL
1 OFF
2 OFF
3 OFF
4 OFF
5 OFF
6 OFF
7 OFF
8 OFF

0 EXIT TEST MODE

Figure 13-2 GENERAL Test Mode Screen

b) Pressing 1 OFF through 8 OFF allows you to toggle between ON and OFF. 1 through
6 are features specifically used for the Braille console (maintenance terminal for the
blind).
Table 13-1 lists the functions of the GENERAL test mode.

GENERAL Test Item Function

1 OFF Tests the automatic display of trunk group when trunk calls are
answered
2 OFF Tests the automatic display of trunk group when calls are an-
swered
3 OFF Tests the call status line
4 OFF Tests the texts in small print
5 OFF Tests the automatic display in line in case of a recall
6 OFF Tests the automatic display in line 1 in case of a recall
7 OFF Tests the automatic start of a tape recorder when trunks calls
are answered
8 OFF Tests the automatic start of a tape recorder when trunk calls,
regular calls, and private calls are answered.
Table 13-1 General Test Mode Functions
7. Press 6 TEST PATTERN 1 (RASTER1) to check that the lines on the screen are straight
and evenly spaced. This test displays a grid pattern.
8. Press 7 TEST PATTERN 2 (RASTER2) to check the focus on the AC4 screen. This test
displays a fine dot pattern.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
13-4 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch14.fm
For internal distribution only Verifying the System
Testing the Maintenance Terminal for the Blind

9. Press 8 TEST PATTERN 3 (RASTER 3) to locate faulty keys. This test displays the com-
plete AC4 character set (including symbols).
10. Press 9 TEST MESSAGE CENTER to locate faults in the AC4. This test displays the sys-
tem messages (including symbols).
11. Press * AUDIBLE ALER ON/OFF # PITCH ADJUST to test the ring tone and ring pitch as
follows:
a) Press *. A continuous ring tone is heard.
b) Press * again. The ring tone is terminated.
c) Press #. A 3-second burst of ring pitch is heard.
d) Press # again. A 3-second burst of ring pitch at another pitch level is heard.

There are nine possible distinct ring pitches. Each time # is pressed, a different
> ring pitch is heard.

e) Exit from the ring pitch test by pressing 0.

f) Press 0 to exit the menu.

13.5 Testing the Maintenance Terminal for the Blind

To test the maintenance terminal for the blind:
1. Press the Back key and Line 12 together twice. Different test patterns appear on the screen
when you press various keys on the Braille displays (refer to Table 13-2).

Keystroke Display
Line 1 All pins are down, with the exception of module M1-pin S1, M2-S2,
M3-S3, M4-S7, M5-S4, M6-S5, M7-S6, M8-S8.
The result is a regular pattern.
Line 2 Same display as above for module 9 to module 16
Line 3 Same display as above for module 17 to module 24
Line 4 Same display as above for module 25 to module 32
Line 5 Same display as above for module 33 to module 40
Line 6 Same display as above for module 41, 42
Line 7 to Line 12 Displays are inverted.
All pins are raised, with the exception of the above.
Table 13-2 Maintenance Terminal Test Displays (Sheet 1 of 2)

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 13-5
montbuch14.fm

Verifying the System For internal distribution only

Checking and Testing the Features

Keystroke Display
Return All pins are down.
Continue All pins are down.
Status Software status is displayed
ON/OFF (press All pins alternate between up and down, approximately every four
for approximate- seconds, until you press another key.
ly five seconds)
Table 13-2 Maintenance Terminal Test Displays (Sheet 2 of 2)
The displays for Line 1 to Line 12 indicate a possible failure on the driver board and in the con-
trol line of the Braille display. If, for example, the same pin is up in two modules, then the mod-
ule lines have short-circuited.
The Next, Back, and ON/OFF displays can be used to test the Braille display.
2. After you have completed the internal check mode, test the following calls:
● Make a trunk, tie-trunk, and in-house call
● Activate the night service
● Ask somebody to call you using a trunk and in-house, then forward the calls
3. Refer to the AC4 Operating Instructions for additional information.

13.6 Checking and Testing the Features

To check the available features using the TAP and ensure that they are functioning correctly,
refer to the operating instructions for the terminals and attendant console. Test all features for
functionality.
A list of abbreviations can be found in the HiPath 4000 service manual under the AMO descrip-
tion FEASU.

13.7 Testing the Restart and Failure Transfer Function

Test the restart behavior and the failure transfer function of the system using the TAP.
1. Test soft restart
2. Test hard restart.
To test the failure transfer function of the system (only with an analog trunk):
1. Switch off the main power supply to the system.
2. Test the failure transfer function on the relevant customer device.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
13-6 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch14.fm
For internal distribution only Verifying the System
Backing up the Customer Data

– Is there a dial tone from the exchange?

– Is it possible to dial the exchange?
In the event of a power failure on the system, an analog trunk is switched on an analog
device by means of a drop out relay.
3. After the test is complete, switch on the power to the system again (reload) and wait until
it has started up.

13.8 Backing up the Customer Data

In order to be able to create a customer-specific hard disk as quickly as possible in the event
of a hard disk failure, you must back up the PS program system for every customer.

In HiPath 4000 systems without an MO drive, the program system (ACF) is backed
> up in the Flash Memory (“:M:” drive).

13.9 Setting and Activating the HTS Function

With PABX Teleservice, service activities (for example, system maintenance, troubleshooting,
and universal services) can be performed by means of the telephone network. This facility al-
lows the product specialist to provide support remotely.
PABX Teleservice offers the following features:
● Remote maintenance
● Automatic fault reporting
● Software patches
The system has a standard HTS function. If the customer needs to use a HTS function:
1. Make the necessary hardware and software settings on the system (refer to the Service
Manual description "Hicom Teleservice HTS").
2. Connect the modem for HTS to the V.24 port of the DSCXL module.
3. Set up the extension for HTS (extract from database).
4. Once you have made the required settings, activate and check the Teleservice function us-
ing the TAP.
5. Inform your control center about the new customer and initiate dial-up from the HTS con-
sole.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 13-7
montbuch14.fm

Verifying the System For internal distribution only

Checking the Ring Generator

13.10 Checking the Ring Generator

DANGER
1 Be extremely careful when working with the ring generator. High voltages are
present at the ring generator.
To verify the ring generator, connect an anate to an SLMA port and dial the anate. If the anate
rings like the normal U.S. cadence, it is functioning properly.

13.11 Verifying the Station-to-MDF Connections

If the MDF cabling is performed by a subcontractor, verify and document all work as follows:
1. Check on the progress of the subcontractor’s work.
2. Issue or implement change orders to the subcontractor as needed.
3. Walk through the site to verify that the cabling has been completed according to guidelines,
and either accept the work or write a list of the corrections to be made.

13.12 Verifying Transmission Facilities

This section describes the procedures used to verify CO and DID trunks, ISDN and T1 spans,
and OPS lines and trunks.

13.12.1 Balancing Networks

To ensure optimum transmission performance, the TMC16, TMDID, and SLMA3 channels
must be configured to the balance network that provides the best return loss (ERL and SRL).
The balance network is configured by means of COFIDX field in the Direct AMO Dialog fast-
path code (command) CHATCSU for TMDID, TMC16, and the NWBALNO field in command
CHASCSU for OPS. A default value of 3 provides adequate performance for most trunk facili-
ties, and OPS lines usually perform adequately with a default value of 2.

13.12.2 Choosing the Balance Network

For locally used trunks, the best balance network choice provides the highest ERL value that
is equal to or greater than 10 dB, and an SRL low and SRL high that are equal to or greater
than 10 dB. connotations
For facilities that are utilized within complex networks the best balance choice provides the
highest ERL value that is equal to or greater than 18 dB and an SRL low and high that are equal
to or greater than 10 dB.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
13-8 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch14.fm
For internal distribution only Verifying the System
Verifying Transmission Facilities

Do not select a balance network if the measured ERL value is less than either of the
> measured SRL values.

Table 13-3 shows various sample return loss measurements. In this example the best choice
balance network would be network 3. Network 2 and 5 are acceptable for local trunks. Network
4 is not acceptable.

Network ERL (dB) SRL Low (dB) SRL High (dB)

2 13.7 10.2 11.0
3 18.6 13.2 14.5
4 6.2 5.7 6.1
5 15.7 14.1 14.3
Table 13-3 Return Loss Measurement Examples

13.12.3 Selecting the Balance Network

Caution
7 Use this method only when more than one balance network meets the minimum cri-
teria set previously in Section 13.12.2 on page 13-8. Do not include balance net-
works if the measurements fall below any of the minimum level requirements.
If a trunk only meets or exceeds the minimum requirements on one balance network,
then select that balance network but do not use this method.
To select a balance network:
1. Select a trunk.
2. Take the ERL and SRL measurements for all four networks on the selected trunk.

Compare the four network measurements in each category.

>
3. Assign a quality factor rank (Q number 1 to 4) number, with 4 being the best return loss
measurement. Ignore the trunk if any measurement falls below minimum requirements.
4. List the Q number for each balance network. Select the higher Q number total.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 13-9
montbuch14.fm

Verifying the System For internal distribution only

Verifying Transmission Facilities

In the event that two trunks have the same Q number total, select the network with the high-
est ERL measurement. If both trunks have the same ERL measurement, select the net-
work with the highest SRL low measurement followed by the highest SRL high measure-
ment.
Network 3 (Table 13-4) shows an example of the best trunk balance network using the Q
number method.

Network ERL (dB) ERL Q SRL Low SRL Low SRL High SRL High Q Num-
Number (dB) Q Num- (dB) Q Num- ber Total
ber ber
2 13.7 2 10.2 2 11.0 2 6
3 18.6 4 13.2 3 12.5 4 11
4 6.2 5.7 6.1
5 15.7 3 14.1 4 14.3 3 10
Table 13-4 Return Loss Measurement Examples

13.12.3.1 Balancing CO Trunks

To determine the best central office (CO) trunk configuration, perform the following:
1. Set the balance network in the trunk configuration to 2 as follows:
a) Type the command CHA-TCSU and press Enter.
b) Enter the following values and press Enter after each:
Field Value
PEN1 <LTG-LTU-SLOT-CIRCUIT>
DEV <GRDSTR or LPSTR>
COFIDX 2

The angle brackets (< >) indicate fields that require trunk specific information.
>
2. Activate the CO line to load the new balance network as follows:
a) Type the command ACT-DSSU and press Enter.
b) Enter the following values and press Enter after each:

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
13-10 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch14.fm
For internal distribution only Verifying the System
Verifying Transmission Facilities

Field Value
ONTYPE AUL
TYPE PEN
PEN1 <LTG-LTU-SLOT-CIRCUIT>
PEN2 <LTG-LTU-SLOT-CIRCUIT>
3. Disconnect the maintenance telephone from the MDF block.
4. Connect the transmission test set to the maintenance telephone port (Figure 13-3).

-2.5 dBm 4
HiPath 4000 2

SLMA3 T
or ATI
R
3 6
TMC16 T
5
R 1
40000126ger
1 - Bridge clips
2 - MDF
3 - Demarc
4 - TMS
5 - Central office
6 - Maintenance telephone

Figure 13-3 Test Setup for Measuring ERL and SRL on CO Trunk Channels

5. Verify that the TMS is in termination mode with 600-Ohm impedance.

6. Direct select the trunk under test by dialing # # 8 x x x.
7. Listen for CO dial tone. If you cannot get dial tone, ensure that it is not in use, and then
perform the CO trunk signaling tests.
8. Dial the silent termination number of the facility provider.
9. Measure and note the ERL and SRL (low and high) values.
10. Repeat steps 1 through 9 of this procedure for balance network configurations 3, 4, and 5.

In step 1, change COFIDX=2 in the command line to the correct balance net-
> work configuration number.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 13-11
montbuch14.fm

Verifying the System For internal distribution only

Verifying Transmission Facilities

11. Configure the balance network in the trunk configuration that provided the best ERL and
SRL values.

13.12.3.2 Balancing DID Trunks

To determine the best DID trunk configuration:
1. Set the balance network in the trunk configuration to 2 as follows:
a) Type the command CHA-TCSU and press Enter.
b) Type the following field values and confirm every input with Enter:
Field Value
PEN <LTG-LTU-SLOT-CIRCUIT>
DEV DID
COFIDX 2
2. Activate the DID line to load the new balance network as follows:
a) Type the command ACT-DSSU and press Enter.
b) Type the following field values and confirm every input with Enter:
Field Value
ONTYPE AUL
TYPE PEN
PEN1 <LTG-LTU-SLOT-CIRCUIT>
PEN2 <LTG-LTU-SLOT-CIRCUIT>

Steps 3 through 7 are not applicable to systems with hardware and symptom
> diagnosis (HSD).

3. Disconnect the maintenance telephone from the MDF block.

4. Connect the TMS to the maintenance telephone port (Figure 13-4 on page 13-13).

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
13-12 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch14.fm
For internal distribution only Verifying the System
Verifying Transmission Facilities

-2.5 dBm
4
HiPath 4000 2

T
Analog
board R
3 6

TMDID T
5
board R
1
40000127ger
1 - Bridge clips
2 - MDF
3 - Demarc
4 - TMS
5 - Central office
6 - Maintenance telephone

Figure 13-4 Test Setup for Measuring ERL and SRL on DID Trunk Channels

5. Ensure that the TMS is in terminated mode with 600-Ohm impedance.

6. Have the facility provider seize the DID trunk under test and then terminate it with silent
termination.
7. Using the TMS, measure and note the value of the ERL and the SRL.
8. Repeat steps 1 though 7 for balance network configurations with the COFIDX set to 3, 4,
and 5.
9. Configure the balance network in the trunk configuration that provided the best ERL and
SRL values.

13.12.3.3 Balancing OPS Lines and Trunks

To determine the best OPS line configuration, perform the following:
1. Set the balance network in the trunk configuration to 1 as follows:
a) Type the command CHA-SCSU and press Enter.
b) Type the following field values and confirm every input with Enter:
Field Value
STNO <OPS extension #>
DEVFUNC ANATE
COFIDX 5

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 13-13
montbuch14.fm

Verifying the System For internal distribution only

Verifying Transmission Facilities

2. Activate the OPS line to load the new balance network as follows:
a) Type the command ACT-DSSU and press Enter.
b) Type the following field values and confirm every input with Enter:
Field Value
ONTYPE AUL
TYPE STNO
STNO <OPS extension #>
3. Disconnect the maintenance telephone from the MDF block.
4. Connect the TMS to the maintenance telephone port (Figure 13-5).

HiPath 4000 1 1

T 3 T 7
Analog
board R R
-2.5 dBm

4 5
Analog T 6
board R

40000128ger

1 - Demarc
2 - Bridge clips
3 - Transmission facilities
4 - MDF
5 - TMS
6 - Maintenance telephone
7 - Distant-end OPS telephone

Figure 13-5 Test Setup for Measuring ERL and SRL on OPS Lines

5. Verify that the TMS is in termination mode with 600-Ohm impedance.

6. Call the OPS telephone.
7. Have the distant-end take the OPS telephone off-hook.
8. Measure and note the ERL and SRL (low and high) values.
9. Repeat steps 1 through 8 for OPS line configurations for balance network configurations
2, 3, and 4.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
13-14 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch14.fm
For internal distribution only Verifying the System
Verifying Transmission Facilities

10. Configure the balance network in the line configuration that provided the best ERL and
SRL values.

13.12.4 Verifying ISDN Spans

Verify the functionality of the D channel of the ISDN span as follows:
1. Ensure that the local continuity and the end-to-end link tests have been performed.
2. Ensure that personnel on the far end of the ISDN span have been assigned to perform this
verification procedure with you.
3. Activate the DIU2U board as follows:
a) Type the command ACT-BSSU and press Enter.
b) Type the following field values and confirm every input with Enter:
Field Value
ONTYPE AUL
LTG <LTG>
LTU <LTU>
SLOT <SLOT>
4. Activate the D channel of the ISDN span as follows:
a) Type the command ACT-DSSU and press Enter.
b) Type the following field values and confirm every input with Enter:
Field Value
ONTYPE AUL
PEN <PEN of the D channel>
5. Activate all the bearer channels of the ISDN span as follows:
a) Type the command ACT-DSSU and press Enter.
b) Type the following field values and confirm every input with Enter:
Field Value
ONTYPE AUL
PEN <PEN1><PEN2>
The D channel becomes operational within 15 seconds.
If the D channel is not operational within 15 seconds after activation, check the configura-
tion for the different types of applications in Table 13-5 on page 13-16 through Table 13-8
on page 13-17.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 13-15
montbuch14.fm

Verifying the System For internal distribution only

Verifying Transmission Facilities

Record the device type and bipolar eight substitution information.

>
BCSU Parameters If the near end is The far end should be
Timing type (TIMTYP) SYST LOOP
Frame (FRAME) STD STD
Bipolar eight substitution YES YES
(BI8SUB)
Bipolar violation detection YES YES
Network or user emulation NETWK USER NETWK
(NETUSR)
Table 13-5 BCSU Configuration Checks for CorNet Trunks

TCSU Parameters If the near end is The far end should be

Device type (DEV) S1D S1D
S1B S1B
Table 13-6 TCSU Configuration Checks for CorNet Trunks

BCSU Parameters Near End

Timing type (TIMTYP) LOOP
Frame (FRAME) <STD or ESF> (Must be the same as the far-end configura-
tion.)
If the frame = ESF, check the bipolar eight substitution
(BI8SUB) value.
BI8SUB <NO or YES> (Must be the same as the far-end configura-
tion.)
Bipolar violation detection <NO or YES> (Must be the same as the far-end configura-
tion.)
Network or user emulation (NE- USER
TUSR)
Table 13-7 BCSU Configuration Checks for AT&T, MCI, and SPRINT ISDN Trunks

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
13-16 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch14.fm
For internal distribution only Verifying the System
Verifying Transmission Facilities

TCSU Parameters Far End

Protocol (PROTOCOL) <ATT49, ATT59 or MCI for SPRINT and MCI2 for MCI>
(Must be the same as the far-end configuration).
Table 13-8 TCSU Configuration Checks for AT&T, MCI, and SPRINT ISDN Trunks

If all of the configurations are correct and the D channel is still not operational, con-
> tact your next level of support.

13.12.5 Verifying T1 Spans

To verify T1 spans:
1. Activate the DIU2U board as follows:
a) Type the command ACT-BSSU and press Enter.
b) Type the following field values and confirm every input with Enter:
Field Value
ONTYPE AUL
TYPE PEN
PEN1 <PEN1>
PEN2 <PEN2>
2. Activate all the channels of the span as follows:
a) Type the command ACT-DSSU and press Enter.
b) Type the following field values and confirm every input with Enter:
Field Value
ONTYPE AUL
TYPE <PEN>
PEN1 <PEN1>
PEN <PEN2>
3. Ensure that the local continuity and the end-to-end link tests have been performed.
4. Perform a bit error rate test (BERT). Should the BERT fail, contact your local provider.
5. Display the current link error count of the T1 span as follows:
Type the command DIS-BSSU and press Enter. Repeat this action several times.
Field Value
LTG 1
LTU <LTU>
P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 13-17
montbuch14.fm

Verifying the System For internal distribution only

Verifying the MO-Disk Drive

SLOT <SLOT>
CCTNO <blank>
DIS-TYPE <blank>
RESET <blank>
After 15 seconds, the T1 span enters the green alarm state and the following errors stop
increasing:
● Bipolar error seconds (BES)
● Out-of-frame error seconds (OES)
● Up slips (U.S.)
● Down slips (DS)
● Error seconds (ES)
● Frame slips (FS)
If the T1 span enters the green alarm state but the errors are increasing, perform a BERT.

13.12.6 Recording Circuit IDs

Record circuit IDs in the Jack and Pin Record Data Sheet of the Siemens 9751 CBX and 9200
CBX System Site Log.

13.13 Verifying the MO-Disk Drive

Verify the operation of the MO-disk drive by checking its status as follows:
1. Type DIS-DSSM and press Enter.
2. Type the following values, then press Enter.
Field Value
UNIT A1
TYPE C
CNO 6

13.14 Verifying the Hard Disk

Verify the hard disk as follows:
1. Check the status of the hard disk drive as follows:
a) Type DIS-DSKST and press Enter.
b) Enter the following values and press Enter after each:

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
13-18 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch14.fm
For internal distribution only Verifying the System
Verifying the Hard Disk

Field Value
UNIT <A1, V1, T1>
TYPE C
CNO <1 - 8>
The screen displays IN SERVICE.
2. If the drive is not ready, repeat steps 1a and 1b, and proceed to the following steps:
a) Enter the command ACT-DSKX and press Enter.
b) Enter the following values and press Enter after each:
Field Value
UNIT <A1, V1, T1>
CNO <1 - 8>
3. If the hard disk does not activate, perform steps 5 through 10 in Section 13.13 on page
13-18.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 13-19
montbuch14.fm

Verifying the System For internal distribution only

Verifying the Operation of System Features and Servers

13.15 Verifying the Operation of System Features and Servers

This section provides test procedures to verify the operation of the HiPath 4000 system fea-
tures and servers.

13.15.1 Testing CDR

Test the call detail recording (CDR) list output of the system as follows:
1. Print the following information by typing the commands shown in Table 13-9, one at a time.

command Com- Information to Retrieve

mand
DIS-MSEL Operating condition, basic device (BASDEB), STNTBL1, and DNOTBL1
DIS-MLIST Station number
DIS-MFREQ DIALOGFIELD
Table 13-9 CDR Reports to Retrieve
2. From the DIS-MSEL printout, select a selection group that has OPERATION CONDITION
= ON.
3. If STNTBL1=N, and DNOTBL1=N, then all stations are valid for CDR. If STNTBL1=Y, and
DNOTBL1=Y, find valid stations for CDR from the command DIS-MLIST printout.
4. If BASDEV=DEV#, then the CDR must be sent to a printer or a terminal (depending on the
configured device on port 1 of the ADP).
5. Make an external call from any valid station. The CDR must be sent either to a printer or
to a terminal when the call is completed.
6. If BASDEV=CDRC1 or (CDRC2), then the CDR must be sent to a file. From the FCP DIS-
MFREQ printout, if at least one dialog field number exists, establish an external call from
any valid station.
7. Type the command DIS-MFREQ and then press Enter.
8. Type the field value DIAFNO=<dialog field #>, and then press Enter.
9. The CDR must be sent to a file.
10. If the dialog fields are free in the DIS-MFREQ command printout: type the command ADD-
MFREQ and press Enter.
11. Type the following field values and confirm every input with Enter:
Field Value
TYPE L
DIAFNO 1

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
13-20 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch14.fm
For internal distribution only Verifying the System
Verifying the Operation of System Features and Servers

FILE CDRC1
FILESTA <YYMMDDHHmm>
FILEND <YYMMDDHHmm>
FORMFORM0 2
BLKSIZE 127
FOUT Y
STAT YYMMDDHHmm>
MULTOUT N
PERIOD 0
SELSTOP Y
12. Make an external call from any valid station.
13. Type the command OUT-MFREQ and press Enter.
14. Type the field value DIAFNO=<l> and then press Enter.
15. When the CDR test is finished, type the command DEL-MFREQ and press Enter.
16. Type the field value DIAFNO=<l> and then press Enter.

13.15.2 Testing Least-Cost Routing

Test the least-cost routing (LCR) configuration of the system after all of the outgoing trunks
have been cut over and tested as follows:
1. Print the reports in Table 13-10.

command Com- Parameters to Information to Retrieve

mand Set
DIS-LROUT Trunk group numbers and route numbers
DIS-LDPLN Dialing patterns and route numbers
DIS-LSCHD LCR schedule
DIS-LAORT Area code and office code restrictions
DIS-LCOS LCR classes of service
DIS-DPLN TYPE=STN ROLMnet dialing patterns and route numbers
DIS-TGACC PEN locations of trunk circuits
Table 13-10 LCR Reports to Retrieve
2. Select a dialing pattern from the Dialing Patterns and Route Numbers report.
3. Note the route number that is associated with the selected dialing pattern.
4. Note the first trunk group (route element) associated with the route number in the Trunk
Group Numbers and Route Numbers report.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 13-21
montbuch14.fm

Verifying the System For internal distribution only

Verifying the Operation of System Features and Servers

5. Ensure that the trunk group is available to test as follows:

a) Check the LCR schedule report to ensure that the LCR schedule presently allows ac-
cess to the selected route element. (Look at the Trunk Group Numbers and Route
Numbers report and note the letters under the SCHEDULES field that have been
marked with an X. Use these letters as an input to the LCR schedule report.)
If the schedule blocks a call to that trunk group, change the system date and time to
comply with the schedule, by typing the command CHADATE.
b) Check for a READY status of the actual trunk circuits in that group by typing the com-
mand DIS-SDSU-TK with the PENs found in the PEN locations of the trunk circuits
report.
c) Check the AUTH field of the Trunk Group Numbers and Route Numbers report to en-
sure that the LCOS for the maintenance extension is high enough to use that route by
typing the command DIS-SCSU to find the LCOSV of the maintenance extension.
d) Check the AORT field of the Trunk Group Numbers and Route Numbers report to en-
sure that the test number does not contain an area code or office code that is blocked
for that route. Use the AORT index number from the Trunk Group Numbers and Route
Numbers report in the DIS-LAORT report to check this.
6. Dial a far-end test number that incorporates the selected dialing pattern. Ensure that the
call is complete.
7. Ensure that one of the trunks in the trunk group was seized by call processing, by typing
the command DIS-SDSU with the PENs found in the PEN Locations of Trunk Circuits re-
port. The initials CP should appear in the status field.
8. Deactivate the trunk group by typing the command DEADSSU with the PENs found in the
PEN Locations of Trunk Circuits report.
9. Repeat steps 4 through 8 with the remaining route elements (trunk group) in the route.
10. Repeat steps 3 through 9 with the remaining dialing patterns in the Dialing Patterns and
Route Numbers report.
11. Repeat steps 2 through 9 with a ROLMnet extension from each route found in the ROLM-
net Dialing Patterns and Route Numbers report.
12. If the date and time were changed in step 5a, reset them to their correct values.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
13-22 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch14.fm
For internal distribution only Verifying the System
Verifying the System Bypass

13.16 Verifying the System Bypass

Verify the system bypass as follows:
1. Check the punch down sequence of the DSCXL board.
2. Refer to the HiPath 4000 Service Manual for the SSD information of the DSCXL board to
check whether the system bypass is functioning properly.

13.17 Customer Training, I.M.

Once the system is fully operational, the following basic training is to be provided for each sys-
tem.
● Basic introduction to the HiPath 4000 system for a person nominated by the customer.
● Explanation of the functionality and performance of the attendant console (operation of the
attendant console)
● Functionality of the Chese (Executive/Secretary service) in hard-coded and freely-pro-
grammable keys.
● Introduction to the digital console including the team function, which is available in hard-
coded and freely-programmable keys.
The customer is responsible for nominating the participants in the basic training. The number
of participants is limited to 2-4 persons.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 13-23
montbuch14.fm

Verifying the System For internal distribution only

Customer Training, I.M.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
13-24 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch15.fm
For internal distribution only Adding Cabinets to the System

14 Adding Cabinets to the System

This section describes procedures to add cabinets to the HiPath 4000.

14.1 Expansion Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

14.2 Connecting the Cabinet Stacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 14-1
montbuch15.fm

Adding Cabinets to the System For internal distribution only

Expansion Configuration

14.1 Expansion Configuration

MDFHX6 MDFHX6 MDFHX6 MDFHX6 MDFHX6 MDFHX6

(UP/UPR..1) (UP/UPR..2) (UP/UPR..3) (UP/UPR..4) (UP/UPR..5) (UP/UPR..6)

UP/UPR.. 3 UP/UPR.. 7 UP/UPR.. 11 UP/UPR.. 15

UP/UPR.. 2 UP/UPR.. 6 UP/UPR.. 10 UP/UPR.. 14

UACD 2 UP/UPR.. 1 UP/UPR.. 5 UP/UPR.. 9 UP/UPR.. 13

UACD 1 CSPCI UP/UPR.. 4 UP/UPR.. 8 UP/UPR.. 12

Power box Stack 1 Stack 2 Stack 3 Stack 4

Figure 14-1 Expanded HiPath 4000 Configuration with Maximum MDFHX6 Number

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
14-2 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuch15.fm
For internal distribution only Adding Cabinets to the System
Expansion Configuration

The expansion cabinets in a multiple-cabinet system (maximum four cabinets) are on top of the
basic (CC80F) cabinet. The expansion cabinets are secured together using quick-release locks
on the front.
To expand the system:
1. Release the cabinet by turning the quick-release locks 90° to the left or right (see Figure
14-2 on page 14-4).
2. Lift the housing cover off the base cabinet.

The housing cover and backplane are also secured in the same manner as the
> expansion cabinets. This allows components to be removed individually after
the quick-release locks have been released.
3.

Caution
7 The connecting screws between the individual cabinets are not used for internal
grounding purposes.

4. Mount the expansion cabinet on top of the existing expansion cabinet.

5. Secure with screws.
6. Refer to the hardware to connect the telephony cables.

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions 14-3
montbuch15.fm

Adding Cabinets to the System For internal distribution only

Connecting the Cabinet Stacks

Figure 14-2 Removing System Components

14.2 Connecting the Cabinet Stacks

To connect the cabinet stacks, refer to Section 6.2.2, “Installing the Ground Straps Between
Cabinets”

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
14-4 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuchSIX.fm
For internal distribution only Index

Index Z

Numerics Burning Behavior of HiPath System Cables

16DA splitting strips 1-11
installing 4-6
24DA splitting strips
C
installing 4-7 Cable routing
24-port boards AP 3700-13 to MDF (MDFHX6) 9-4
removing 4-1 AP 3700-13 to MDF (MDFHX8) 9-7
60-volt power supply APPS 7-14 LTU-MDF (MDFHX6) 9-3
LTU-MDF (MDFHX8) 9-6
A Cabling assemblies, external 9-1
AC cables 10-5 CDR
AC connection to power supplies 7-14 applications 2-16
AC4, installing 10-2 CMI fuse module 9-27
AC-to-DC connection (redundant) 7-26 CO trunks, balancing 13-10
AC-to-DC connection of the LTUW box 7-25 codes and regulations
AC-to-DC power box installation 5-4 CSA 1-12
Adapter 2 4-5 Common control units
Administrative data processor 2-14 overview 2-11
ADP Connecting the power box to the system 7-65
system startup 2-14 connecting to the mains and power supply 7-
ADS 1
applications conventions 1-3
BELAU 2-16 Covers
system security 2-16 removing 3-12
AP3300 multiple cabinet CSPCI box configuration
installation 5-3 Duplex configuration 2-4
AP3300 single-cabinet installation 5-2 Simplex (Mono) 2-5
AP3700 cabinets
installation variants 5-18
D
data protection 1-20
B data security 1-20
Balance network DC connection (redundant) 7-28
overview 13-8 DC connection with external power supplies
selecting 13-8 7-20
Balancing CO trunks 13-10 DC power supplies
Balancing DID trunks 13-12 AP 3700 cabinets 7-33
Balancing OPS lines and trunks 13-13 DC-to-DC power box installation 5-5
Battery cable cross-sections 7-68 DID trunks, balancing 13-12
Battery Manager cabinet 7-59 Distance adapter
Battery, connecting to the power box 7-29 installing 10-27

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions Z-1
montbuchSIX.fm

Index For internal distribution only

Drill template MDF MDFHX 6 5-26 hardware 3-19

Drill template MDF MDFHX 8 5-27 installation kit 3-19
DSCXL displays 12-15 software 3-19
ISDN spans
F verifying 13-15
feedback, documentation 1-21
L
G LAN connections (shielded) 1-12
ground contact 1-6 Line cables, internal 8-1
Ground straps between individual cabinets 6- LPC80 operation mode 7-19
2, 6-4 LPC80 setting options 7-18
Ground straps for cabinet base 6-3
ground wire 1-6 M
Grounding Magneto optical disk drive
AP 3700 cabinets 6-8 verifying the 13-18
base cabinet, U.S. 6-6 Mains connection
cabinet frame 6-5 AP 3700 cabinets 7-32
HiPath 4000 system 6-1 LUNA/LPC80 7-5
LTU cabinets (internal) 6-7 single-phase network 7-10
main distribution frame 6-1 three-phase network 7-9
Grounding overview 1 6-9 variants 7-4
Grounding overview 2 6-10 with mid-point grounding 7-12
mains connection
H power box 7-8
Hard disk, checking 13-18 MDF cable assignment 9-9
Hardware and symptom diagnosis 2-16 MDF power supply 7-30
HiPath 4000, AC-powered, nonredundant 2- MDF splitting strips (I.M. version) 4-6
2 MDFHX6, assembly 9-2
MDFHX8, assembly 9-5
I Music-on-hold interface box, installing 10-30
Important labels on the system 3-17
Installation materials 3-5 N
Installation notes 4-1 notations used in the manual 1-3
Installation procedures 3-1
Installation variants 5-1 O
Installation with AP 3300 cabinets 5-1 OPS lines and trunks, balancing 13-13
Installing Optiset E adapter modules
music-on-hold interface box 10-30 installing 10-30
PSIO breakout box 10-25 overview of network connection 1 7-11
Installing seismic anchors 3-20 overview of network connection 2 7-13
Integrated servers Overview of subscriber line modules/trunk
secondary, description 2-16 board connections 9-11
Interface Overvoltage protection for boards 9-8
maintenance terminal 2-16
Inventory

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
Z-2 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions
 montbuchSIX.fm
For internal distribution only Index

P Switching unit
Pin assignment for signals or alarms 9-10 overview 2-11
Positioning the HiPath 4000 cabinet 3-9 symbols used in the manual 1-3
power supplies 7-14 System
Preparing for installation 3-1 leveling 3-10
product ID -safety- 1-12 System bypass
PSDXE connection 7-67 verifying 13-23
PSIO breakout box, installing 10-25 System configuration 2-2

R T
Realtime Diagnostics System 2-16 Telephony shelves 2-13
Receiving the system 3-6 Testing
reference manuals 1-3 CDR 13-20
Remove the system from its packaging. 3-7 LCR 13-21
Tools and equipment 3-6
S Trunk boards, connecting 9-19
safety information 1-5 Trunk bypass, installing 8-6
caution 1-7 Trunk lines
danger 1-6 pre-installation procedures 3-19
emergencies 1-10
reporting accidents 1-10 U
warning 1-7 UACD power box 7-55
Secondary integrated server UDCD power box 7-62
description 2-16 UL and CSA standards 1-12
Seismic anchors, installing 3-20 UL and CSA standards (Table 1-1) 1-12
Server types and applications overview 2-13 Unloading
Service alarm cable, connecting 8-6 system with roller base 3-7
Service units 2-11 UP/L80XF DC connection 7-25
Shelf configuration 5-10 using this manual 1-2
AP3700-13 5-16
AP3700-9 5-12
V
CSPCI box 5-10 Verifying
LTUW box 2-5 ISDN spans 13-15
power box stack 5-18 system bypass 13-23
UP cabinet 5-12 Verifying the
UPR cabinet 5-11 MO disk drive 13-18
Shielding connection on the LTU frame 4-12 Verifying the hard disk 13-18
Shipping damage 3-7 Verifying the system
Signal cables, installing 8-1 tools required 13-2
SIPAC-SIVAPAC adapter 4-5
SIVAPAC-to-SIPAC adapter 4-2
Strapping lists 9-28
Subscriber line modules, connecting 9-13
Switching networks 2-11

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions Z-3
montbuchSIX.fm

Index For internal distribution only

P31003-H3140-S101-1-7631, 08/2007
Z-4 HiPath 4000 V4.0, Installation Instructions